en_tn/tn_MRK.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	r2f2				0	Introduction to the Gospel of Mark Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Mark Introduction (1:1-13) The ministry of Jesus in Galilee Early ministry (1:14-3:6) Becoming more popular among the people (3:7-5:43) Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26) Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52) Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37) The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8) What is the book of Mark about? The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his lifetime. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Who wrote the book of Mark? The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What were Jesus’ teaching methods? The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar to the ways other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. Jesus often taught by telling parables, stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues What are the Synoptic Gospels? The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.” The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible. Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”? In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things: The phrase “son of man” can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, a human being. The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “Son of Man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is different than the first because God gives this Son of Man authority forever. Therefore, the title “Son of Man” became a title for the Messiah. Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title. Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time? The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next. Sabbath/Sabbaths Often in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “Sabbaths.” This is simply for the sake of rendering the translated text as close to the original text as possible. In the UST, Sabbaths is changed to singular, Sabbath, to make more sense of the use of the word in its context. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark? Some verses found in older versions of the Bible are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translator’s region that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be surrounded by square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel. “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16) “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44) “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46) “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28) The following passage is not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar to the modern versions of the Bible. “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Having gone into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. The one having believed and having been baptized will be saved, and the one not having believed will be condemned. These signs will go with the ones believing: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	c6ep				0	Mark 1 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter “You can make me clean” Leprosy is a disease of the skin. It made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) “The kingdom of God is near” Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming or is a combination of both. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.” Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
4	1:1	kpq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This verse introduces the reader to the history of Jesus the Messiah as told by Mark. This functions as an introduction to the entire book of Mark. Use the natural form in your language for beginning the telling of something that actually happened. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent)
5	1:1	i3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The words Son of God form an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the alternate translation: “who is God’s Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
6	1:2	fc4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7	1:2	e3by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, we read,” or “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, he wrote,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
8	1:2	z8b7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that this sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
9	1:2	gu7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὸ προσώπου σου	1	Here, before your face is an idiom which means that the messenger was sent first, and then the second person came after him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify. Alternate translation: “first” or “before you”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10	1:2	fsqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	The term Behold focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case “seeing” means giving attention to what follows. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “Pay attention!” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
11	1:2	s28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	προσώπου σου & τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	Here, both uses of the pronoun your refer to Jesus and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
12	1:2	kl12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	That the messenger will prepare your way represents preparing the people for the Lord’s arrival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who will prepare the people for your arrival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13	1:3	lkm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, he is saying,” or “a voice crying out in the wilderness, hear him saying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
14	1:3	dqi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	Here there is a direct quotation nested inside a direct quotation as Mark quotes Isaiah, who quotes the messenger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
15	1:3	cf0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	φωνὴ βοῶντος	1	Here, a voice refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear his voice as he cries out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16	1:3	v3n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	Make ready the way of the Lord and make his paths straight mean the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two. See the next note for alternate translations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
17	1:3	peh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1	Here Isaiah uses the metaphor of preparing paths or the way on which someone will travel to make them walkable. If a person in high authority were coming, the people would clear the roads of any hazards. So this metaphor means that the people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
18	1:3	yyk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	Κυρίου	1	In this quotation from Isaiah, the Lord refers to God, but Mark is showing how it also refers to Jesus the Messiah. However, do not translate this as “Jesus” here, because this double reference must be maintained. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo)
19	1:3	h8rt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν	1	The imagery of a path, or the way, is used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for someone else, the preparer makes the path walkable. If someone in high authority was coming, others would make sure the roads were cleared of any hazards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
20	1:3	wltl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἑτοιμάσατε & ποιεῖτε	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, both occurrences of the word make are plural and are commands addressing a group of people. Use the natural forms in your language to express this meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
21	1:4	s05n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	The baptism of repentance proclaimed by John the Baptizer likely had its origin in baptisms done by Gentiles who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
22	1:4	dtqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind repentance, forgiveness, and sins, you can express those ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have repented of their former evil way of living and that God has forgiven them for sinning against him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23	1:5	u9yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα	1	The phrase region of Judea is used here to refer to the people living within Judea, a large area in which the city of Jerusalem was located. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
24	1:5	cf75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες	1	Here, the whole region and all the inhabitants are generalizations that refer to a great number of people but not to every single person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
25	1:5	h8h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and he was baptizing them in the Jordan River, and they were confessing their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26	1:6	n3rk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας καὶ μέλι ἄγριον.	1	This verse helps provide background about John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
27	1:6	kyy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας	1	If your language does not use the passive form was clothed, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John wore camel hair and a leather belt around his waist, and ate locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	1:6	j141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου	1	The camels’ hair that John wore had been woven into rough, course material which was then made into clothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John was clothed in rough clothing woven from camel’s hair” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29	1:6	h518		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	καμήλου	1	If your readers would not know what a camel is, you could include a description in a footnote or use a more general term. Alternate translation: “animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30	1:6	jpzh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀκρίδας	1	If your readers would not know what locusts are, you could include a description in a footnote or use a more general term. Alternate translation: “grasshoppers” or “insects” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
31	1:7	p7tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐκήρυσσεν λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he announced loudly to the people” or “he proclaimed these things, saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
32	1:7	l7jd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν	1	The pronoun he is referring to John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “John was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
33	1:7	bk1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχεται & ὀπίσω μου	1	Here, coming after me means that this mightier person would come at a later time than John came. It does not mean that he is behind John, chasing John, or following John as a disciple of his. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34	1:7	g8fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ	1	Untying the straps of sandals was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that John is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
35	1:8	e4qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak of spiritual baptism, which will put people under the influence of the Holy Spirit. If possible, use the same word for baptize here as you used for John’s baptism. That should aid the comparison between the two. If this is not possible, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “but he will join you to the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
36	1:8	r1j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, baptism by water and baptism by the Holy Spirit are being contrasted. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
37	1:9	u65k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	This phrase, And it happened that in those days, marks the beginning of a new event in the storyline. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
38	1:9	y8ea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	The phrase those days refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
39	1:9	gi39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
40	1:9	zv8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus went from Nazareth in Galilee” or “Jesus went out from Nazareth in Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
41	1:10	stwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	εὐθὺς	1	The word immediately occurs often throughout the book of Mark. As used here, it means that the event it introduces occurs directly after the previous event. Use a natural form in your language for communicating this. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential)
42	1:10	n8sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he saw the heavens bursting open” or “he saw God tearing the heavens open” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
43	1:10	m5f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit of God coming down from heaven as a dove comes down to earth” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile)
44	1:11	jh9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν	1	Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification)
45	1:11	s6f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός	1	The term Son is an important title for Jesus. The title Son describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
46	1:12	mh8n			εὐθὺς	1	See how you translated the word immediately in Mark 1:10
47	1:12	yv6v			τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον	1	Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus into the wilderness”
48	1:13	k2kt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and all the while Satan tempted him” or “during which time Satan kept trying to persuade him to disobey God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
49	1:13	siu3			ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων	1	Alternate translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals”
50	1:14	q12s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But after the governor, Herod, had John arrested” or “But after Herod’s soldiers arrested John” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
51	1:14	o4oh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην	1	The governor, Herod Antipas, had John arrested and put into prison because John continually rebuked Herod Antipas for his sins. See 6:14-29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
52	1:14	tmh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην	1	This phrase provides background information that sets the time period for Jesus’ ministry. Jesus did not begin his ministry until John had been arrested. Use the natural form in your language for expressing this information. Alternate translation: “Later, John was arrested. After that,” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background)
53	1:14	ys3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Also, it might be more natural to indicate that Jesus was returning to Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back to Galilee” or “Jesus returned to Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
54	1:14	ns6b			κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Alternate translation: “telling the people there about the good news”
55	1:15	fzq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς καὶ ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The phrase The time has been fulfilled is an idiom that means that something which God said would happen has finally happened. Often, this refers to a prophecy of the Old Testament being fulfilled in New Testament times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God said that his rule would come near, and now it has come near” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
56	1:15	rhom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said” or “and informing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
57	1:15	quab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The time has come” or “What God promised is now happening” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
58	1:15	yo11			ἤγγικεν	1	The phrase has come near could mean: (1) has entered into human history and begun in a new and fuller way. Alternate translation: “has begun” or (2) will soon begin in a new and fuller way. Alternate translation: “will soon begin”
59	1:16	z3j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	The purpose of throwing the net was to catch fish in it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “were throwing a net into the water to catch fish” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
60	1:16	xor6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ; ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. You may also wish to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because they were fishermen, they were casting a net into the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
61	1:17	zui3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου	1	Come after me is an idiom which means to become a disciple of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Join the group of my followers” or “Become my disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62	1:17	mlc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων	1	The expression fishers of men means that Simon and Andrew will teach people God’s message so others will also follow Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will teach you to gather men to me like you gather fish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
63	1:17	i2sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
64	1:18	tnuc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	εὐθέως	1	See how you translated the word immediately in 1:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
65	1:18	gvia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ	1	Here, they followed him means that they went with Jesus and intended to remain with him as his disciples. Make sure that you use a phrase that does not imply that they followed him with any evil intention or followed far behind him. Alternate translation: “they walked away with Jesus to learn from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
66	1:19	xl2m			καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα	1	Here, mending refers to restoring something, usually by sewing, to make it ready to use. Since a net is made of ropes, this probably meant stitching, weaving, or tying it together. Alternate translation: “are repairing their nets”
67	1:20	zjz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express explicitly what Jesus called James and John to do. Alternate translation: “having called them to come with him” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
68	1:20	f77b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	Here, they refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
69	1:20	b2ci			ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase, they went away after him means the same as “they followed him” in 1:18. Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus”
70	1:22	bsc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	The author intentionally leaves out the repeated information in this sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify. Alternate translation: “for he was teaching them as someone who has authority teaches and not as the scribes teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
71	1:22	e9gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς.	1	Here, Jesus’ teaching is being contrasted with the way that the Jewish teachers taught. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
72	1:22	kmxf			ἐξεπλήσσοντο	1	Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue were amazed”
73	1:23	w7z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	The person with the unclean spirit is in the synagogue while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful in your langauge, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit was also in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
74	1:24	ra8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ?	1	The demons ask the rhetorical question, What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth in order to tell let Jesus know that they do not want him to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them alone. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
75	1:24	m8gz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς	1	The demons ask the rhetorical question Have you come to destroy us in order to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
76	1:24	qsig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς	1	Here, us refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1-20). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
77	1:28	hrbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	The phrase went out everywhere means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it throughout the region of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout all of Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
78	1:29	ybs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
79	1:30	bvvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἡ & πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα	1	This phrase gives background information about Peter’s mother-in-law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
80	1:30	vnp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πυρέσσουσα	1	A fever is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. This usually results in the need to lie down in bed and rest, as Peter’s mother-in-law was doing. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “being feverish from illness” or “being ill with an elevated temperature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
81	1:31	bzd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός	1	Here, the author mentions Jesus helping her up before mentioning that Jesus took her by the hand, even though it happened in the opposite order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “Jesus took her hand and helped her up out of bed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
82	1:31	sff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός	1	This is a metaphor meaning that Jesus healed her of the fever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “he healed her of the fever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
83	1:31	i5br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διηκόνει αὐτοῖς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly that she probably served them food. Alternate translation: “she provided them with food and drinks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
84	1:32	h0y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος	1	Now when it became evening, after the sun had set gives background information which helps the reader know the time in the day when this was occurring. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
85	1:32	d1i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους	1	The word all is an exaggeration to emphasize the great number of people who came. It is not likely that every single sick person was brought to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great number of people who were sick or possessed by demons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
86	1:33	grp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν	1	The word city means the people who lived in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many people from that city gathered outside of Simon’s house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
87	1:33	pa4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καὶ ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν	1	The entire city did not gather at his door. This expression the whole city is used to express that a large number of people came to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Many people from the city gathered at Simon’s door” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
88	1:37	vgc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε	1	The word Everyone is an exaggeration to emphasize that many people were looking for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people are looking for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
89	1:38	plm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ	1	Here, Jesus uses the word us to refer to himself, along with Simon, Andrew, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
90	1:38	z53z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις	1	The passages which follow clarify what is meant by the surrounding towns. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
91	1:39	lb9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	κηρύσσων, εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλων	1	Jesus’ was both preaching and casting out demons. Jesus was not necessarily doing these in any order. Use the appropriate connecting word or phrase to show that Jesus was doing both of these things together. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous)
92	1:39	zs4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἦλθεν & εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	The words in all express an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations in Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he went to many places in Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
93	1:41	l9jg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	Here, the word moved is an idiom meaning to feel emotion about another person’s need. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having felt compassion for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
94	1:41	flc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun compassion in another way. Alternate translation: “feeling compassionate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
95	1:41	qjz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	θέλω	1	If I am willing would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply what Jesus is willing to do from the context. Alternate translation: “I am willing to make you clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
96	1:43	iw7t			αὐτῷ	1	General Information: The pronoun him which is used here refers to the leper whom Jesus healed.
97	1:44	xhu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ	1	Jesus told the man to show himself to the priest so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “get inspected by the priest to confirm that you are healed of the leprosy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
98	1:44	w6b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σεαυτὸν δεῖξον	1	Here, the word yourself represents the skin of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
99	1:45	i91a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον	1	Here, spread the word widely is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
100	1:45	z363		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντοθεν	1	The word all sides is a hyperbole used to emphasize from how very many places the people came. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
101	2:intro	zhb5				0	Mark 2 General Notes Structure and Formatting Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12) Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14) The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17) Questions about fasting (2:18-22) Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28) Special Concepts in this Chapter “Sinners” When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like theft or murder, or they committed sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Fasting and feasting People would fast (not eat food for a longer than usual period of time) when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical questions The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son (Mark 2:7). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant (Mark 2:25-26). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
102	2:1	ir5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	2:1	j6pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ	1	The author tells us that Jesus entered again to remind us that he had already been in Capernaum in 1:21. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
104	2:1	afvi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν	1	There is some debate over whose house this is. It could possibly be: (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place to which Jesus always returned when he was in Capernaum. Alternate translation: “He was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic and not specify whose house it was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
105	2:3	s21g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	παραλυτικὸν	1	Here, a paralytic is someone who, because of injury or disease, is not able to use their arms, legs, torso, or some combination of those parts of their body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
106	2:4	v6ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι	1	In the region where Jesus lived, houses had flat roofs made of clay covered with tiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
107	2:4	ouxr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κράβαττον	1	A mat was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture on which you might carry an injured person to take them for medical attention. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” or “a cot” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
108	2:5	trg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
109	2:5	hzg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τέκνον	1	The word Child here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this that would be appropriate in this context, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
110	2:6	le6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here, hearts is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
111	2:7	yr5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ	1	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means that Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view he would be speaking blasphemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man should not be speaking this way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
112	2:7	sj6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός?	1	The scribes used this question to say that since no one is able to forgive sins except God alone, then Jesus should not say “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
113	2:8	niy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here, spirit means Jesus’ inner thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
114	2:8	h3zp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful in your language, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having become aware though no one told him” or “Jesus, without hearing them, knows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
115	2:8	wga7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
116	2:8	s3m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ταῦτα & ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	The word hearts means their inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
117	2:9	wv5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1	Jesus is not asking for information but is using the question form here to prepare the scribes and Pharisees for the miracle he is about to perform. It is easier to say, “Your sins are forgiven you,” because there is no visible proof when someone’s sins are forgiven. However, if someone says to a paralyzed person, “Get up and take up your mat, and walk,” but the person does not do so, then it is obvious that the person speaking lacks God’s authority. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is surely easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ than to say, ‘Get up and walk!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
118	2:9	q905		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
119	2:10	g4jn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰδῆτε	1	The word you refers to the scribes and the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
120	2:10	jsyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “God has given me, the Son of Man, authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
121	2:11	f369		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου, καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου	1	The words get up, take up your mat, and go were not commands that the man was able to obey with his own strength. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed, and then the man was able to obey this command. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can get up, take up your mat, and go away to your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
122	2:12	ki94			ἔμπροσθεν πάντων	1	Alternate translation: “in the presence of everyone in the house”
123	2:12	e0xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν ἔμπροσθεν πάντων	1	The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And all at once the man was healed, so he got up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
124	2:13	ma6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς	1	Connecting Statement: In this verse Mark gives background information to tell the reader where the next event is taking place. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
125	2:13	zecn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Your language may say “going” or “went” rather than coming in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “A large crowd was going to him” or “all the crowd went to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
126	2:14	sc4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁλφαίου	1	The word Alphaeus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
127	2:14	ekv0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀκολούθει μοι	1	In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
128	2:15	bwv2			ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus”
129	2:15	zqcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	These two groups are used to express that Jesus and his students were eating with many people upon whom the religious leaders looked down. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
130	2:16	rwu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	Mark is using the possessive form to tell his readers that the scribes were members of the group known as the Pharisees. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scribes, who were members of the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
131	2:16	b1bi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει?	1	The Pharisees and scribes are using the question form to express their disapproval. They believed that religious people should separate themselves from people whom they considered to be sinners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not eat and drink with sinful tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
132	2:17	ak1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a comparison. Just as sick people need a doctor to be healed, so sinners need Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need a doctor’s help; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
133	2:17	c62j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς	1	The ones having sickness are equated with those who are wanting to be saved by Jesus. The ones being healthy are equated with those who do not think they need Jesus. Jesus does not actually think those who do not want him are healthy. He thinks the opposite. He says these words while speaking to people who think they are healthy in their own eyes and do not need Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could be more explicit. Alternate translation: “Those who suppose themselves to be healthy do not need a doctor. It is those who know that they are sick who need a doctor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
134	2:17	lh4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	The words have a need of a physician are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Those who are healthy do not need a doctor, but those who are sick need a doctor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
135	2:17	ca4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι & ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς	1	The words I came … to call are understood from the phrase before this. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
136	2:18	z394		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἔρχονται	1	The phrase they come refers to an unknown group of people. It is best to leave this unknown, as it is not clear who is being talked about here. Alternate translation: “a group of unknown men came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
137	2:18	j1h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες	1	This fast is likely referring to the fast which the religious leaders performed twice per week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now, the students of John and the Pharisees were performing their bi-weekly fast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
138	2:18	y7bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες.	1	This phrase provides background information. Mark is telling his readers this to help them understand why Jesus was being asked this question. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now, it happened at the time when the students of John the Baptizer and the Pharisees were fasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
139	2:19	eke3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach. He wants the scribes and Pharisees to reflect on the actions of his disciples in light of a situation with which they are already familiar. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one tells the groom’s party at a wedding to fast while the groom is still with them!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
140	2:19	tiiz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1	It is best to keep this verse the way it is. Do not clarify that it is about Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
141	2:19	wetb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος	1	The expression sons of is a Hebrew idiom that means a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend to the needs of the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. Alternate translation: “The groom’s attendants” or “The groom’s friends”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
142	2:20	vg2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase the bridegroom may be taken away with an active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave his friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
143	2:20	y79o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	τότε	1	Here, the word then shows the reader that the bridegroom must first leave, after which the friends will begin fasting. Make sure this is clear in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
144	2:21	v6xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν	1	When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was before. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
145	2:21	vdza		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται.	1	This verse, as well as verse 22, is a parable. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
146	2:22	fk15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀσκοὺς	1	The word wineskins refers to bags made out of animal skins and used to store wine. If the bags were old and previously used, and someone put new wine in them, they would likely tear. This happens because wine expands as it sits for a long time, and the old wine skins could no longer stretch with the expanding wine. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
147	2:22	dgcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς	1	In this phrase, it is assumed that new wine is being poured into fresh wineskins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that clear. Alternate translation: “but you should pour new wine into new wineskins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
148	2:23	jya1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας	1	Plucking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the Law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify. Alternate translation: “plucking heads of grain, as the Law permitted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
149	2:23	k3pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς στάχυας	1	The heads are the topmost part of the wheat plant. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “the heads of grain and eating the seeds”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food from which you have to remove a shell or casing and use it in your translation in place of the word grain. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
150	2:24	h41a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1	The Pharisees are not asking Jesus for information, but rather, they are using the question form here to make a statement and emphatically condemn him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
151	2:24	ec3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1	The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
152	2:24	bf8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Look is a word used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
153	2:25	g8sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “You have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
154	2:25	r14d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Jesus refers to reading about what David did, as recorded in the Old Testament. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you not read in the scriptures what David did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
155	2:25	cjzx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν	1	The phrase had need and the word hungry are both expressing the same idea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two expressions in your translation. Alternate translation: “when he was in need of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
156	2:26	y57j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως	1	The phrase the bread of the presence refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
157	2:26	wz3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Jesus is describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking of it as the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
158	2:27	i374		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο	1	With the passive phrase The Sabbath was made for man, Jesus explains why God established the Sabbath. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
159	2:27	u83s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term man is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
160	2:27	v3mb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	The word man is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person but to mankind as a whole. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
161	2:27	s2yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον	1	The words was made are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here if that would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
162	2:28	wgwu			ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
163	2:28	kq1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
164	2:28	pwb5			ὥστε Κύριός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath” (2) Son of Man is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”
165	3:intro	x969				0	Mark 3 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter Sabbath It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) “Blasphemy against the Spirit” No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter The 12 disciples The following are the lists of the 12 disciples: In Matthew: Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot. In Mark: Simon (Peter), James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, Sons of Thunder), Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. In Luke: Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot. Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Judas, the son of James. Brothers and sisters Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 4, 5, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
166	3:1	bm6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εἰσῆλθεν πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν, καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1	Mark uses this sentence to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
167	3:1	rn8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος	1	This expression introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
168	3:1	ye6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1	This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it appear to be smaller. Alternate translation: “whose hand was shriveled” or “whose hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
169	3:2	vr25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	The Pharisees wanted Jesus to heal the man so that they could accuse him of breaking the law by doing work on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they could accuse him of wrongdoing” or “so that they could accuse him of breaking the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
170	3:2	q35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase tells the reader why the Pharisees were watching Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. You might also want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “They were doing this so that they could accuse him of working on the Jewish day of rest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
171	3:3	nm6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον	1	Here, midst is referring to the group of people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
172	3:4	mh3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is lawful to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is allowed that people do good on the Sabbaths, but not do evil. Likewise it is allowed that a person save someone on the Sabbaths, but not kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
173	3:4	vz6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	The phrase is it lawful is assumed here. If it would be helpful in your language, you may clarify and add it again to the second phrase. Alternate translation: “is it lawful to save a life or to kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
174	3:4	nut4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ψυχὴν	1	The phrase a life refers to physical life and means “a person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
175	3:5	n4ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	The phrase hardness of heart is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness that anyone would do anything on the Sabbath—whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. If your readers would not understand what it means to have hardness of heart in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
176	3:5	c3qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “Jesus healed his hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177	3:6	nvk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν	1	Herodians is the name of a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
178	3:8	bi1b			τῆς Ἰδουμαίας	1	Idumea is the region, previously known as Edom, which covered the southern half of the province of Judea.
179	3:8	mm5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐποίει	1	This phrase refers to the miracles Jesus was performing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the great miracles that Jesus had performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
180	3:9	zu5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν	1	As the large crowd was pushing forward toward Jesus, he was in danger of being crushed by them. They would not crush him intentionally; the danger was because there were so many people who wanted to touch him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
181	3:10	e86s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	This verse tells why so many people were crowding around Jesus that they might crush him. Alternate translation: “For, because Jesus had healed many people, everyone pressed against him so that they might touch him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
182	3:10	ge71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	They pressed against him because they believed that touching Jesus would make them well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “all the sick people pushed forward, eagerly trying to touch him so that they might be healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
183	3:10	qyyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ & ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	Here, pressed against him means they came very close to Jesus to make physical contact with him. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this might be misunderstood, think of a way to express this more clearly in your language. Alternate translation: “so all the people who had diseases surrounded him closely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
184	3:11	ca5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα	1	Here, they refers to the unclean spirits. It is they who cause the people they possess to do such things. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they caused the people they were possessing to fall down before him and to cry out to him, saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
185	3:11	xf41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The title Son of God is an important title for Jesus. See how you translated this title in 1:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
186	3:13	fatx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος	1	Here, he goes up on the mountain does not refer to a specific mountain. This phrase is an idiom which means that Jesus was in a mountainous area. If it would be helpful in your language, you may state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus went up into the mountainous regions” or “Jesus went up into area with many hills” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
187	3:16	ywli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα	1	Some manuscripts do not include the words and he appointed the Twelve. This is likely original, but some writers decided to leave it out because verse 14 has a similar phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
188	3:16	ozli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	Mark is using the adjective Twelve as a noun to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chose to be apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
189	3:16	rj1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case with the Twelve, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
190	3:16	i7tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον	1	The word Simon is the name of the first man listed. All of the names listed in 3:17-19 are also names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
191	3:16	bt0f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον	1	In ancient times, people changed their names to show that something about themselves was changing. Here, Jesus changes Peter’s name to show that Peter is now one of his followers and to describe something about him that is important. This also happens in the next verse. If this would be misunderstood, think of something in your language that people do to signify a major change in their lives. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
192	3:17	n4gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ βροντῆς	1	Jesus called the brothers Sons of Thunder because they were like thunder. Alternate translation: “the name Boanerges, which means ‘Men Who Are Like Thunder’” or “the name Boanerges, which means ‘Thunder Men’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
193	3:19	r3zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν	1	Mark adds the phrase who also betrayed him to tell the reader that Judas Iscariot was the one who would betray the Lord. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
194	3:20	jxr5			καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον	1	This is likely the same house which was mentioned previously. See note on 2:1.
195	3:20	rq6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν	1	The word bread represents food. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples could not eat at all” or “they could not eat anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
196	3:21	uyl8			ἔλεγον γὰρ	1	Here, they could refer to: (1) his relatives. (2) some people in the crowd.
197	3:21	mf5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέστη	1	The phrase out of his mind is an idiom that refers to acting crazily. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
198	3:23	q8f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν?	1	Jesus asked this rhetorical question in response to the scribes saying that he cast out demons by Beelzebul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out himself!” or “Satan does not go against his own evil spirits!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
199	3:23	xb13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Σατανᾶν	1	The name Satan is used here to refer to Satan’s “kingdom” and not just him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his own power” or “his own evil spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
200	3:24	j5sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη	1	Jesus uses this parable to show why the scribes are wrong to think Jesus is controlled by Satan. He is saying that if a group of people is not united, they will not be able to exist together successfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
201	3:24	b4z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ	1	The word kingdom refers to the people who live in the kingdom. Alternate translation: “If the people who live in a kingdom are divided against each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
202	3:24	k3bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι	1	This phrase, not able to stand means that the kingdom, no longer united, will fall. Alternate translation: “will no longer exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
203	3:24	h7hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase in positive form. Alternate translation: “will fall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
204	3:25	zcr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἰκία	1	The phrase a house means the people who live in a house. Alternate translation: “a family” or “a household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
205	3:25	dm6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι	1	This is another parable which shows the religious leaders why they are wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
206	3:25	dlev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι	1	This parable is almost identical to the previous one. If the repetition would confuse readers, you could use one or the other. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
207	3:26	w7na		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη	1	The word himself is a reflexive pronoun that refers back to Satan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
208	3:26	vif7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καὶ εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει	1	While this parable is similar to the previous two, it would be good to retain it, as the parable refers back to the original problem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
209	3:26	df2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει	1	This means Satan will fall and not endure. Alternate translation: “he will cease to be united and will be finished” or “he cannot endure, and he comes to an end” or “he will fall and come to an end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
210	3:27	mvr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ; καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει.	1	This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits and saving the people whom Satan had previously controlled. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
211	3:27	x9lk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	οὐδεὶς	1	This phrase, no one, does not refer to a specific person but to people in general. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
212	3:28	f6fq			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of his statement that follows. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement in this context. Alternate translation: “I am telling you truthfully” or “I can assure you”
213	3:28	p6sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the phrase sons of men is an idiom which refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “of people” or “of mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
214	3:28	gp6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the terms sons and men are masculine, Jesus is using these words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” or “of mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
215	3:29	ips3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὃς δ’ ἂν βλασφημήσῃ	1	Here, whoever does not refer to anyone in particular but is a generic word for any person. Alternate translation: “but the person who has blasphemed” or “but whichever person might have blasphemed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
216	3:30	sfa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει	1	This is an idiom that means to be possessed by an unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “An unclean spirit is controlling him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
217	3:31	gef8			καὶ ἔρχονται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “Then Jesus’ mother and brothers arrived”
218	3:33	qe8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?	1	Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved ones. He has not forgotten who his physical family members are, but these are people who belong to his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you whom I consider to be my mother and brothers” or “I will tell you whom I love as a mother or brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
219	3:33	iu9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1	Jesus uses the words mother and brothers here not to refer to biological relatives but to those whom he loves and who obey God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
220	3:35	dr45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὃς & ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, whoever does not refer to any specific person but to any person who does the will of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whichever person may do the will of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
221	3:35	yr9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν	1	This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
222	4:intro	f5ua				0	Mark 4 General Notes Structure and Formatting Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Parables The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
223	4:1	i95e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	Jesus stepped into a boat because the crowd was so big that, if he had stayed among them, it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat on the water so the crowd could hear his teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
224	4:2	h2a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
225	4:3	vqh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι	1	By telling a story, Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear what he teaches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story! Behold, a sower went out to sow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
226	4:3	gmdi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀκούετε	1	The word Listen is an command which Jesus uses to get his listeners to listen carefully to what he is about to say. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Listen to what I am about to say!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
227	4:4	si37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on the path were not hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell on the path, where they lay unprotected from hungry animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
228	4:5	wuw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἄλλο ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες	1	In this verse and in the following four verses, the word other is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
229	4:6	z2el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος	1	Here, the sun rose is an idiom which means the sun approached its highest point in the sky, usually the hottest part of the day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
230	4:6	ee49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκαυματίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can restate it was scorched in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched the plant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
231	4:7	bw62			ἄλλο ἔπεσεν	1	See the note on 4:5
232	4:8	v3sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	αὐξανόμενα, καὶ ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipses are used here to shorten the phrases, but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “producing a plant that bore 30 times as much grain or 60 times as much grain or even 100 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
233	4:8	u327		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τριάκοντα & ἑξήκοντα & ἑκατόν	1	“thirty … sixty … a hundred.” These may be written as numerals. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
234	4:9	p2us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	The phrase has ears here refers to the willingness to understand and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
235	4:9	qxy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
236	4:10	u2nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας	1	The phrase he was alone does not mean that Jesus was completely alone. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the 12 disciples and some of his other close followers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
237	4:10	kqcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 11:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
238	4:11	t9ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have given you the mystery of the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
239	4:11	q2az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκείνοις & τοῖς ἔξω	1	The phrase to those, the ones outside refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
240	4:12	p4fv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν	1	Here, but may not see means being spiritually blind and not understanding the significance of what Jesus is doing. If your readers would not understand what it means to “not see” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “so that looking, they may not understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
241	4:12	e33y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν	1	Mark is quoting Jesus, who is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. For clarity, you could also indicate the source of the words that Jesus is quoting. Alternate translation: “so that as the prophet Isaiah said, though they see, they will not perceive, and though they hear, they will not understand” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes)
242	4:12	p9yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	Here, turn means to “repent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
243	4:13	fs1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε?	1	Jesus used Do you not understand this parable? and how will you understand all the parables? to show how disappointed he was that his disciples could not understand his parable. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “If you cannot understand this parable, think about how hard it will be for you to understand all of the other parables” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
244	4:14	m72p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “The one sowing the seed represents a person who proclaims God’s message to others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245	4:14	rp6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	Here, the word means the message which Jesus was proclaiming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sows the message which Jesus was proclaiming” or “sows the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
246	4:14	xdaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	Here, sowing the word means teaching Jesus’ words to others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The sower teaches people God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
247	4:15	p68u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτοι δέ εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Some people represent the instance when the seeds fell along the path” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
248	4:15	gcuh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	οὗτοι	1	The word these is a generic noun for people. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
249	4:16	ty3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ οὗτοί εἰσιν ὁμοίως οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “And in a similar way, some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the rocky soil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
250	4:16	d7ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	οὗτοί	1	See the note on these in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
251	4:16	gdq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones which the sower sowed on the rocky soil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
252	4:17	p5fr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς	1	This is a comparison to young plants that have very shallow roots. This metaphor means that the people were first excited when they received the word, but they were not strongly devoted to it. If your readers would not understand what they have no root in themselves means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they did not allow the word to transform their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
253	4:17	s5mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐκ & ῥίζαν	1	They have no root in themselves is an exaggeration to emphasize how small the roots were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
254	4:17	t21w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σκανδαλίζονται	1	The phrase they fall away is an idiom which means to stop believing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they no longer believe in God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
255	4:18	uu9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed among the thorny plants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
256	4:18	wlab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἄλλοι	1	See note about others on 4:15 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
257	4:19	wa3k			αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος	1	Alternate translation: “the worries in this life” or “the concerns about this present life”
258	4:19	s7s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσπορευόμεναι, συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον	1	Jesus uses the metaphor choke to depict what these peoples’ desires do to them. Similarly to how a thorny plant can choke a young plant, worldly desire choke faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not allow the faith to grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
259	4:19	f4ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄκαρπος γίνεται	1	Here, unfruitful means that God’s word in this person will not produce the desired results. In the Bible, a person who produces good works is spoken of as “fruitful” and a person who does not produce good works is spoken of as “unfruitful.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the person does not do good works, showing that they follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
260	4:20	axh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this metaphor plainly. Alternative translation: “those people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the good soil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
261	4:20	d3r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 30 grains, some produce 60 grains, and some produce 100 grains” or “some produce 30 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 100 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
262	4:20	tdwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τριάκοντα & ἑξήκοντα & ἑκατόν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
263	4:21	zzw7			αὐτοῖς	1	Here, to them refers back to the Twelve and others around Jesus in verse 10. Alternate translation: “to the Twelve and others with him”
264	4:21	nn7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην?	1	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
265	4:21	dkq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην	1	Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases, as modeled by the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
266	4:22	y5kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
267	4:22	kc6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	These two phrases, nothing is hidden and nothing secret has happened, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely everything that is hidden will be revealed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
268	4:23	k1a8			εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	See how you translated this in 4:9
269	4:24	r2r1			ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:21
270	4:24	zis1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The one who thinks carefully about the things I have said, God will allow him to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
271	4:24	c4xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add even more to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
272	4:25	i24l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται αὐτῷ & ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
273	4:26	n1mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement: Here, Jesus tells his listeners a parable to explain the kingdom of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
274	4:26	r5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Jesus begins a parable that continues through verse 29. In this parable, he compares the kingdom of God to a man who throws the seed on the ground. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express the meaning of throws the seed plainly. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God: just as a farmer plants seed by scattering it over his field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
275	4:26	htar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	The word man is not speaking of any specific person but any people who scatter seed. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “As a farmer scatters seed upon the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
276	4:28	cew8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	πρῶτον χόρτον, εἶτα στάχυν, εἶτα πλήρης σῖτον ἐν τῷ στάχυϊ	1	These words show that this happened one after another. Make sure that this is clear to your audience in your translation. Alternate translation: “First the stalks appeared. After this the heads appeared. Finally, the mature grain in the heads appeared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
277	4:29	ah9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον	1	Here, the sickle is a metonym that stands for the farmer or the people whom the farmer sends out to harvest the grain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “he immediately goes into the field with a sickle to harvest the grain” or “he immediately sends people with sickles into the field to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
278	4:29	yd1d			δρέπανον	1	A sickle is a handle with a curved blade or a sharp hook used to cut tall crops down to the ground to be harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, use a tool that is used to do this job in your culture.
279	4:29	hx6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός	1	Here, the phrase the harvest has come is an idiom for the grain being ripe for harvest. Alternate translation: “because it was time for the farmers to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
280	4:30	ivk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν?	1	Jesus asked this question to cause his hearers to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about the kingdom of God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
281	4:31	w4l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅταν σπαρῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone sows it” or “when someone plants it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
282	4:32	x1xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους	1	The mustard tree is described as causing its branches to grow large. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with large branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
283	4:33	y7i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν	1	This verse marks the end of this section of Jesus’ parables. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
284	4:34	oo4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς	1	Mark uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
285	4:34	gp99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐπέλυεν πάντα	1	Here, everything does not actually mean everything, but rather, all of his parables which he had spoken. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he explained all his parables” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
286	4:38	b4xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα	1	The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
287	4:38	phc3			Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher is a respectful title. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
288	4:38	qtb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	The word we includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
289	4:39	yym6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted the wind and the sea to do. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be calm!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
290	4:40	w5n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν	1	Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are afraid when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
291	4:41	u8e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ	1	The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
292	5:intro	lh25				0	Mark 5 General Notes Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “Talitha, koum” The words Talitha, koum (Mark 5:41) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
293	5:1	fix1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	Connecting Statement: This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Gerasenes lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
294	5:1	gt8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
295	5:1	vsc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	This name refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
296	5:2	pf16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	This is an idiom meaning that the man is controlled by the unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “whom an unclean spirit controlled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
297	5:4	nsol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι	1	This verse and the next verse function as background information to tell the reader about this man who was controlled by an evil spirit. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
298	5:4	da4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν πολλάκις & δεδέσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people had bound him many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
299	5:4	nep6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
300	5:4	fk7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πέδαις	1	Here, shackles are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attached with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move far. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
301	5:6	y6c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ	1	After having seen Jesus, the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
302	5:7	ux6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	General Information:	0	General Information: If it would be helpful in your language, the information in this verse and 5:8 may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
303	5:7	ppu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου?	1	The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
304	5:7	kd19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου	1	This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
305	5:9	h6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν.	1	The spirit who is speaking speaks on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. Here, we includes him and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
306	5:9	oa64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν	1	A legion is the name of a group of 6,000 Roman soldiers. The unclean spirit uses this name to tell Jesus that they are many. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My name is Legion. This is our name because there are many of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
307	5:10	gtq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας	1	Mark inserts this verse and the following verse to give important information about what Jesus does with the spirits. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
308	5:13	iff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς	1	It may be helpful to your readers to state clearly what Jesus allowed the unclean spirits to do. Alternate translation: “Jesus allowed the unclean spirits to do what they asked permission to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
309	5:13	a28z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ὡς δισχίλιοι	1	Alternate translation: “about two thousand pigs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
310	5:13	ntl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντα	1	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
311	5:15	qih4			τὸν λεγεῶνα	1	Legion was the name of the many demons that were in the man. See how you translated this in Mark 5:9.
312	5:15	fb4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σωφρονοῦντα	1	This is an idiom meaning that he is thinking clearly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “being of a normal mind” or “thinking clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
313	5:18	pup5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “by pleading, ‘Please let me stay with you!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
314	5:19	e21m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν αὐτόν	1	Jesus was not allowing the man to get into the boat and be with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But he did not allow the man to come with him in the boat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
315	5:20	g8ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Δεκαπόλει	1	This word is the name of a region that means “Ten Cities.” It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
316	5:20	y8vn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πάντες ἐθαύμαζον	1	It may be helpful to state who the people were who were marveling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
317	5:22	v1dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάειρος	1	The word Jairus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
318	5:22	u1rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	Your language may say “goes” or “went” rather than “comes” or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
319	5:23	jd27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The expression lay your hands often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hand or hands on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jarius is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
320	5:23	kzz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that you might heal her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
321	5:25	e2cz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα	1	This phrase introduces the woman as a new character in the story. Consider how new people are introduced into a story in your language and use that here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
322	5:25	h58w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη	1	The woman did not have an open wound. Rather, her monthly flow of blood would not stop. Your language may have a polite way to refer to this condition. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
323	5:25	idh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δώδεκα ἔτη	1	Alternate translation: “for twelve years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
324	5:27	z2hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	She had heard reports about how Jesus healed people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had healed people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
325	5:28	alc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν γὰρ	1	This verse tells the reader that the woman had determined to touch his clothes in her mind before she actually touched Jesus’ cloak. Think of a way in your language which makes it apparent that this is the reason why she touches Jesus’ cloak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
326	5:28	wge2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσομαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
327	5:29	c1vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sickness had left her” or “she was no longer sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
328	5:30	ma2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν	1	When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt his power healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “power from his body had healed someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
329	5:33	r3a0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ, φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα	1	Both the words afraid and trembling are similar words which are used to show that the woman was very fearful. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these two words into one expression. Alternate translation: “The woman was very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
330	5:33	b6kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	The phrase the whole truth refers to how she had touched him and became well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “told him the whole truth about how she had touched him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
331	5:34	gbk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	θυγάτηρ	1	Jesus used the term Daughter to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is clear to your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
332	5:35	t2wd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον	1	The rhetorical question Why trouble the teacher any longer is a statement used to express that they should not bother Jesus anymore. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer!” or “There is no need to bother the teacher any longer!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
333	5:35	vqt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν; τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?	1	The statement Your daughter died explains why he asks the question here. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Why trouble the teacher any longer? For your daughter died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
334	5:39	a3ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε	1	Jesus asked this question to help them see their lack of faith. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is not a time to be upset and crying!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
335	5:39	dzrk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	The words The child are assumed in the second phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The child is not dead, but the child is sleeping” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
336	5:39	g83c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	Jesus is using is sleeping to indicate that the death of child is only temporary. That is, although the child had died, Jesus intends to make her alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child will not remain dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
337	5:41	hx3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ!	1	This is an Aramaic phrase which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her language. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
338	5:42	pt5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἦν & ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	Alternate translation: “she was twelve years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
339	5:42	m49c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	Mark includes the information about her age to help his readers understand how the little girl immediately rose up and began walking. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this because she was 12 years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
340	5:43	n29k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
341	6:intro	kl7n				0	Mark 6 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter “Anointed with oil” In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
342	6:1	mi7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Connecting Statement: This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event occurred. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After a time, Jesus and those who followed him left there and returned to where he grew up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
343	6:1	lpci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν & ἔρχεται εἰς	1	Your language may say “came” rather than went or “went” rather than comes in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came out … went to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
344	6:2	y4xj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
345	6:3	s3wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς?	1	Those who were in the synagogue with Jesus are asking all of these questions to emphasize that they know who Jesus is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
346	6:3	tlub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰακώβου & Ἰωσῆτος & Ἰούδα & Σίμωνος	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
347	6:3	d2g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The people in the synagogue were not offended by who Jesus was. They were offended by what he was teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “by what he said to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
348	6:4	l436		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
349	6:4	b42w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only place that a prophet is not honored is” or “A prophet is honored everywhere except” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
350	6:4	y2oa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. In this case, the second and third phrases are more precise, smaller groups of people. If the repetition might confuse your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “among the people with whom he grew up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
351	6:4	mutm			τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν	1	Here, relatives refers to people who are related to Jesus, but are not his siblings, mother, or father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural way in your language to express this.
352	6:4	mgbp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus uses the phrase in his own house to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
353	6:7	d6sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δύο δύο	1	Alternate translation: “2 by 2” or “in pairs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
354	6:7	ldbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
355	6:8	k5hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they should only bring a staff on their journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
356	6:8	t9a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μὴ ἄρτον	1	Here, bread means food in general. Alternate translation: “no food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
357	6:11	b2kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν	1	The expression shake off the dust that {is} under your feet indicates strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture of rejection in your culture, you could use it here in your translation. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
358	6:14	ly7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has caused John the Baptist to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
359	6:15	fgy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν	1	It may be helpful to your readers to state why some people thought Jesus was Elijah. Alternate translation: “Some others said, ‘He is Elijah, whom God promised to send back again’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
360	6:15	n8sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But some were saying that he is Elijah, while others were saying that he is like one of the prophets who lived long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
361	6:16	ym2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα	1	Here, Herod uses the word I to refer to himself. Although he says here that he beheaded John, his soldiers beheaded John at his command. The word I is a metonym for Herod’s soldiers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom I commanded my soldiers to behead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
362	6:16	n6nq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
363	6:17	vpr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly that Herod sent his soldiers to put John in prison. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
364	6:17	ojtd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	γὰρ	1	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
365	6:17	sf6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	The word Philip is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
366	6:18	e2ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	Herod put John into prison because he was saying It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Herod told his soldiers to arrest John because he was saying, ‘God’s law does not allow you to marry the wife of your brother’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
367	6:19	x35v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἡρῳδιὰς & ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι	1	Herodias did not plan to personally kill John, but she wanted someone else to execute John for her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “Herodias … wanted someone to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
368	6:20	k13z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον	1	The word righteous and the word holy mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that John was a very righteous man. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “because he knew that he was a very righteous man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
369	6:21	m54q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἡρῴδης τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν, τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the name Herod actually means his servants, whom Herod would have commanded to prepare the meal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod had his servants prepare a dinner for his officials” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
370	6:22	a1d7			εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος	1	We know from verse 17 that Herod married Herodias after she divorced his brother. Herodias’ daughter, who danced for Herod, was Herod’s niece and step-daughter. There are a few possible reasons why Mark refers to her as his daughter Herodias. Mark could: (1) be referring to Herod’s daughter-in-law as if she were Herod’s daughter’s to emphasize how close they were. Alternate translation: “And his daughter by Herodias” (2) be speaking about the daughter by using the name of her better-known mother, Herodias.
371	6:25	caz0			εὐθὺς & μετὰ σπουδῆς & ἐξαυτῆς	1	The words immediately, with haste, and at once all communicate a sense of urgency. Make sure to communicate this urgency in your language.
372	6:25	ap2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δῷς μοι	1	The implication is that the daughter of Herodias wants King Herod to have someone cut off John the Baptizer’s head and then give it to her. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you cut off John’s head and bring it to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
373	6:26	c1gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly the content of the oaths, and the relationship between the oaths and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oaths that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
374	6:34	j1td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα	1	Jesus compares the people to sheep, which are confused and vulnerable when they do not have their shepherd to lead them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were confused when they did not have someone to lead them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
375	6:35	sei9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης	1	This phrase means it was the day was nearly ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “near the end of the day” or “toward evening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
376	6:35	hz4h			ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος	1	The phrase This place is desolate means that there were no people or very few people in that place. See how you translated the similar phrase in Mark 6:31.
377	6:37	cts5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1	The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
378	6:37	wowk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1	The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we had 200 denarii. Even that amount of money would not be sufficient to buy enough food from the market to feed all of these people” or “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
379	6:37	hs21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	The singular form of the word denarii is “denarius.” A denarius was a Roman silver coin worth one day’s wages for a laborer. Alternate translation: “200 days’ wages worth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
380	6:37	c65w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	Alternate translation: “two hundred denarii” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
381	6:39	xgb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ	1	Describe the grass with the word used in your language to describe healthy grass, which may or may not be the color green. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
382	6:40	e4cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα	1	The phrase according to hundreds and according to fifties refers to the number of people in each of the groups. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in groups of a hundred people and in groups of fifty people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
383	6:41	l8q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	The phrase having looked up to heaven means that Jesus looked up toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Jesus looked up to the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
384	6:43	xk9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα	1	Alternate translation: “twelve full baskets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
385	6:44	v4m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες	1	Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
386	6:44	deov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρτους, πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες	1	Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ location to help readers understand how many people they fed. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
387	6:44	u413		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρτους, πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες	1	The number of women and children was not counted. If it would not be understood that women and children were present, that can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “there were 5,000 men who ate the loaves. They did not even count the women and children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
388	6:45	y3ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	The word Bethsaida is the name of a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
389	6:48	g7ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς	1	The term the fourth watch of the night refers to the time between 3 AM and sunrise. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
390	6:50	et5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	θαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι; μὴ φοβεῖσθε	1	The phrases Take courage and Do not be afraid are similar in meaning. Jesus uses both phrases in order to emphasize to his disciples that they do not need to be afraid. These two phrases can be combined into one phrase if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “I am not a ghost! It is I, Jesus!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
391	6:52	m53m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις	1	Here the phrase about the loaves refers to when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what it meant when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread” or “what it meant when Jesus caused the few loaves to become many” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
392	6:52	t1qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their heart had been hardened. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternately, you could use plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “they had become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
393	6:52	m7yv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία	1	In this verse, the word heart is singular in form, but it refers to all of their hearts as a group. If this would confuse your readers, you could use the plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
394	6:53	p316		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γεννησαρὲτ	1	The word Gennesaret is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
395	6:55	d9k9			περιέδραμον & ἤκουον	1	Both occurrences of the word they in this verse refer to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples.
396	6:56	gi6y			ἐτίθεσαν	1	Here, they refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.
397	6:56	y6hs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	The phrase the sick refers to sick people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
398	6:56	bqzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς	1	These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “any village and city, or even in the rural area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
399	7:intro	vq1j				0	Mark 7 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words quoted from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Hand washing The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people please God by trusting and obeying him. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “Ephphatha” This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
400	7:1	b9ul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων	1	This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
401	7:2	wd6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	General Information:	0	General Information: The following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
402	7:3	mj6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	γὰρ	1	This verse and the next verse are added to explain why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
403	7:3	x0b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	The tradition of the elders consisted of teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had taught them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
404	7:4	wsb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	χαλκίων	1	See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
405	7:4	d3qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων	1	The cups, and pots, and copper vessels would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
406	7:5	hts4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	The phrase walk according to is way of saying “obey.” If your readers would not understand what walk means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Why do your disciples not obey what the elders have taught us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
407	7:5	ugom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, but is used here to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
408	7:5	j7ht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον	1	Here, bread represents food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
409	7:6	oavh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
410	7:6	ep7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς χείλεσίν	1	Here, lips is used to signify speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
411	7:6	zgt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν	1	The word heart means inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
412	7:6	xtab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	The expression their heart is far from me is a way that God is saying that the people are not truly devoted to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” or “but they are not truly devoted to me” or “but they are not really committed to honoring me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
413	7:8	hnw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κρατεῖτε	1	Here, to hold fast to something means to adhere to something consistently. If your readers would not understand what hold fast means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you cling to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
414	7:9	e3qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε	1	Jesus says You do well at rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well by rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
415	7:10	d4sd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the person who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
416	7:11	cd57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	κορβᾶν	1	Corban is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it, using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
417	7:11	ev2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	The author says that is a gift to provide background information to his audience, who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “meaning ‘a gift’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
418	7:14	u3nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε	1	The words Listen and understand are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take heed to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
419	7:15	gk5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέν & ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person can eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
420	7:15	ms5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	By using the phrase the things that come out from the man, Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
421	7:17	l7d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ ὅτε	1	Here, the phrase And when is being used as a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
422	7:18	z8w1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
423	7:18	yqve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι	1	See the note in 7:15 regarding the similar expression. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
424	7:19	y2cr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here, heart means a person’s inner being or mind. Here, Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
425	7:19	hm98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα	1	The phrase making all foods clean explains to the reader the significance of Jesus’ saying. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
426	7:20	r12p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο κοινοῖ	1	What is coming out from the man means the thoughts and intentions of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “It is what a person thinks and desires that defiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
427	7:21	chkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται	1	Here, heart refers to a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “out of the inner being of a person come evil thoughts” or “out of the mind of a person come evil thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
428	7:21	eey1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι	1	Mark lists out a number of sins here and in the next verse. Use a natural form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
429	7:24	k9bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν	1	Connecting Statement: The phrase and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know it, but he was not able to hide provides background information to what Jesus was thinking as he traveled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Having entered someone’s house, he was hoping he would not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
430	7:26	aik7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει	1	This sentence gives us background information about the woman. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
431	7:26	e39y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συροφοινίκισσα	1	The phrase a Syrophoenician explains the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
432	7:27	gsj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν	1	Here, Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are children and the Gentiles as if they are dogs. This is not meant as a derogatory remark, but he is talking in terms of whether they are Israelites or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first eat, for it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like household pets compared to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
433	7:27	r898		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We must first feed the children of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
434	7:27	k2wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον	1	Here, bread refers to food in general. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
435	7:29	sa9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὕπαγε	1	Jesus was implying that the woman no longer needed to stay to ask him to help her daughter. He would do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this. Alternate translation: “you may go now” or “you may go home in peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
436	7:29	sbqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου	1	The demon left the daughter because Jesus commanded it too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have commanded the demon to leave your daughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
437	7:31	cxa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δεκαπόλεως	1	This word, Decapolis, is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in Mark 5:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
438	7:32	jlj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα	1	Prophets and teachers would put place their hand on a person in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, people plead with Jesus to heal a man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they begged Jesus to put his hand on the man to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
439	7:33	ld3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πτύσας	1	Here, Jesus spit on his fingers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after spitting on his fingers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
440	7:34	lbw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ἐφφαθά	1	Ephphatha is an Aramaic word. Mark spelled it using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it meant, “Be opened”. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
441	7:35	yg15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί	1	The phrase his ears were opened means that the man was enabled to hear. Alternate translation: “Jesus opened his ears, and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
442	7:35	yj4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase his tongue was released is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
443	7:35	gssm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the band of his tongue was released means he became able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
444	7:36	eb2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσον & αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
445	7:37	dh17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς & ἀλάλους	1	The phrase the deaf and the phrase the mute both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
446	8:intro	ry56				0	Mark 8 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter Bread When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness. Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) “Adulterous generation” When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The historic present To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) Rhetorical questions Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples Mark 8:17-21 and rebuking the people Mark 8:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Paradox A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” Mark 8:35-37
447	8:1	rmd8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	The phrase In those days introduces a new event that happened some time after the events in the story that Mark has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
448	8:1	sgv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν	1	Connecting Statement: Following this, Jesus explains why the crowd did not have anything to eat. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
449	8:3	u3mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
450	8:4	jdk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας?	1	The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
451	8:6	x2jr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express to recline on the ground as a direct quotation, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
452	8:7	bio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express to serve these also as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the disciples, ‘Serve these fish also’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
453	8:8	v5zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας	1	This refers to the broken pieces of bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread, which filled seven large baskets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
454	8:9	m81z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι	1	Mark includes the phrase Now there were about 4,000 to help his reader to know how many people are there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4,000 people that Jesus fed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
455	8:10	qnt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ	1	And immediately, having gotten into the boat with his disciples is a comment concluding the story of Jesus feeding the 4,000 people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
456	8:10	y8u3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά	1	They got to Dalmanutha in a boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he traveled over the Sea of Galilee to the region of Dalmanutha” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
457	8:10	x33a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαλμανουθά	1	The word Dalmanutha is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
458	8:11	zi91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, heaven refers to where God dwells and is an indirect way of referring to “God” himself. If your readers would not understand the use of the word heaven in this context, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
459	8:12	sn5a			ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase sighed greatly in his spirit means that Jesus groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated the word “sighed” in Mark 7:34.
460	8:12	s8xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase in his spirit means “within himself” or “to himself.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
461	8:12	g4lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?	1	Jesus asks Why does this generation seek for a sign to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
462	8:12	l335		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον	1	When Jesus speaks of this generation, he is referring to some of the people who lived at that time and who were not following God. He was not speaking of every single person alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Why do you Pharisees ask for a sign” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
463	8:12	a2x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ δοθήσεται & σημεῖον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
464	8:12	q4wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1	The phrase **if a sign will be given to this generation … ** is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
465	8:13	i2se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς	1	Jesus’ was not the only one who left; his disciples were with him also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left them and got into the boat again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
466	8:13	u1qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	The phrase to the other side is referring to the other side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
467	8:14	gtg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	καὶ ἐπελάθοντο λαβεῖν ἄρτους, καὶ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ	1	If it would appear in your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ disciples only brought one loaf of bread onto the boat with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
468	8:15	bd2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε	1	The warning phrases Keep watch and Be on guard both have very similar meanings and are repeated here for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Make sure you keep watch” or “Be sure to guard yourselves against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
469	8:15	nszl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου	1	Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to yeast. When yeast is put into bread, it affects the entire batch of bread which is made. You should not explain this when you translate it, for the disciples themselves did not understand it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
470	8:16	zfw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν	1	The word no is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread (Mark 8:14), but that was not enough for all of them. Alternate translation: “they have very little bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
471	8:17	hnh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε	1	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from the disciples. but rather. he is rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I am speaking of actual bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
472	8:17	dmt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε	1	The phrase Do you not yet perceive and the phrase nor understand have the same meaning. Jesus uses these phrases together here to emphasize the fact that they do not understand. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
473	8:17	wf6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε	1	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By now, you should perceive and understand the things I say and do.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
474	8:17	fn31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Here, the word hearts refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Have you become resistant to understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
475	8:17	rq8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	The phrase hearts become hardened is a metaphor for not being able or willing to understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
476	8:17	mihv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your thinking has become so dull!” or “You are so slow to understand what I mean!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
477	8:18	u1gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε?	1	Jesus continues to rebuke his disciples by asking them more questions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have eyes, but you do not understand what you see. You have ears, but you do not understand what you hear. You should remember the things that I have said and done.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
478	8:18	qt58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	The phrases do you not see and do you not hear are both idioms meaning that the disciples did not understand. They heard and saw everything Jesus did, but they did not understand what it meant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do you not understand the things which I have said and done the whole time you have been with me?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
479	8:19	t7ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους	1	Alternate translation: “the five thousand people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
480	8:20	lip5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους	1	Alternate translation: “the four thousand people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
481	8:21	kh42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?	1	Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke his disciples for not understanding what he has done in front of their eyes. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I have said and done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
482	8:22	c92c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
483	8:22	mj78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν	1	Jesus and his disciples traveled to Bethsaida in a boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they came to Bethsaida in a boat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
484	8:22	mul4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	The word Bethsaida is the name of a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated the name of this town in Mark 6:45. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
485	8:22	mx9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται	1	They wanted Jesus to touch the man in order to heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to touch him in order to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
486	8:24	r6tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας	1	The man sees people walking around, yet they are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to trees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
487	8:25	td9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη	1	The phrase was restored can be written is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus restored the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
488	8:27	e4l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “came” rather than went in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples came out into the villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
489	8:28	nn1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι & ἄλλοι	1	The two occurrences of others in this verse both refer to “other people.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
490	8:30	rgy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express they might tell no one about him as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
491	8:31	d4dc			τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
492	8:31	m32p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
493	8:31	gjg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1	The events of this verse progress in chronological order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “first, and for the elders and the chief priests and the scribes to reject me. Then, people will kill me. But after that, on the third day, I will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
494	8:31	h9t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν	1	By referring to himself as the Son of Man, Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If this would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “it was necessary that he, the Son of Man, should suffer many things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
495	8:33	nu32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ	1	By saying Get behind me, Satan, Jesus could mean: (1) that Satan is directly influencing Peter to think and act the way he is. (2) that Peter is acting like Satan because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do, which is the very thing that Satan also tried to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
496	8:33	r9gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	In this verse Jesus is saying that Peter is acting in a way that he should not act. Here, the word but introduces a contrast between setting one’s mind (thoughts) on the things of God and setting one’s mind (thoughts) on the things of men. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
497	8:33	clxo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	To set your mind on something means to think about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not focusing your thoughts on what God desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
498	8:33	t6jv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Jesus leaves some words out in the phrase on the things of men that would be needed in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires, but you are thinking about what man desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
499	8:33	tn0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of people” or “that humans think about” or “that people think about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
500	8:34	m732		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν	1	Here, ** to follow after** Jesus represents being one of his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
501	8:34	c6ll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	The cross here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “be willing to suffer and die for my sake and follow me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
502	8:35	d5rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ	1	By using the word whoever, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
503	8:35	nn0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἀπολέσει αὐτήν	1	Here, lose it is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
504	8:36	ua46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus is not seeking information here, but rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
505	8:36	mxuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Mark is using the phrase a man here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
506	8:36	jde6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον	1	The phrase the whole world is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
507	8:37	wua4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?	1	Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
508	8:38	c53y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ	1	Jesus speaks of this generation as adulterous, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what adulterous means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery and sinned against God” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
509	8:38	ov1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1	See how you translated this generation in 8:12 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
510	8:38	s5tm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
511	8:38	hvx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
512	9:intro	n92j				0	Mark 9 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter “Transfigured” Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Hyperbole Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” (Mark 9:43), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Elijah and Moses Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically. “Son of Man” Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (Mark 9:31). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) Paradox A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” (Mark 9:35).
513	9:1	q4b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state who he refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
514	9:1	ad4e			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly, I say to you in 3:28.
515	9:1	xm40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Here, the pronoun you is plural, in the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, and you refers to everyone to whom Jesus is speaking. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “Truly, I say to all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
516	9:1	kg4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1	The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
517	9:1	qloy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
518	9:1	ymou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun power by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
519	9:1	yjf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1	The phrase the kingdom of God come with power represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase the kingdom of God come with power probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in 9:2-10. Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
520	9:2	uf5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	Mark uses the reflexive pronoun themselves here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
521	9:2	krt6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	The word transfigured means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
522	9:2	b3bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase he was transfigured before them with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
523	9:3	gp48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι	1	The word launderer refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word launderer, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
524	9:4	f2d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἠλείας	1	The word Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 6:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
525	9:4	j83a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μωϋσεῖ	1	The word Moses is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 1:44. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
526	9:4	r3uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the word them refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
527	9:4	pj3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες	1	Here, the word they refers to Elijah and Moses. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
528	9:4	sh7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase were seen with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they saw Elijah and Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
529	9:4	y9r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The word them refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
530	9:5	w6vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the word answering is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
531	9:5	iqc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	Here, the pronoun us could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case us would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
532	9:5	k3y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σκηνάς	1	Shelters are simple, temporary places with roofs under which to sit or sleep. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
533	9:5	ou1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μωϋσεῖ	1	The word Moses is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 1:44. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
534	9:5	u7di		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἠλείᾳ	1	The word Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 6:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
535	9:6	r3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
536	9:6	f8hn			ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο	1	Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”
537	9:7	e3id			ἐγένετο & ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them”
538	9:7	x4mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης	1	Mark speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from the cloud to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud and said” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification)
539	9:7	ybu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου	1	The word Son is an important title for Jesus. Here, the word Son describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
540	9:7	lg0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀκούετε	1	Listen is a command or instruction God gave to Peter, James, and John. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
541	9:8	hq73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι & εἶδον	1	Here, the pronoun they refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
542	9:9	q2qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	The first occurrence of the word they in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
543	9:9	pdmm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
544	9:9	w1nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1	Here, the pronoun them and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun they all refer to Peter, James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
545	9:9	wter			διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1	Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them not tell anyone about what they had just seen”
546	9:9	t07p			ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
547	9:9	zttm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can clarify that Jesus is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “he, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
548	9:9	w98g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ	1	Jesus speaks in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “would come back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
549	9:10	edv3			καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1	Here, Mark is using the term word in a specific sense, to mean “matter” or “event.” Alternate translation: “And they kept the matter to themselves”
550	9:10	to7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Mark is describing something Jesus would say by association with the words that came from his mouth when he taught them this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
551	9:10	wfu9			ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	See how you translated the phrase “risen from the dead” in 9:9.
552	9:11	s9zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1	Here, the pronoun they refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
553	9:11	je29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν	1	Here, the pronoun him refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
554	9:11	wgsr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἠλείαν	1	See how you translated the name Elijah in Mark 6:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
555	9:12	o8hf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔφη	1	Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
556	9:12	s3q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ?	1	Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the Son of Man must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
557	9:12	xazj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	Here, it is implied that those who would despise the Son of Man would be people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “would be despised by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
558	9:12	toik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning behind the phrase been written with an active form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
559	9:12	i3j7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could state the phrase would be despised in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
560	9:13	k3kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating explicitly what the Jewish people did to Elijah. Alternate translation: “our leaders treated him very badly, just as they wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
561	9:14	n8fd			ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the other disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”
562	9:14	qsp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς	1	Here, both occurrences of the pronoun them refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
563	9:15	qhc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν	1	All three occurrences of the pronoun him in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
564	9:16	w679		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς	1	Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun them could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crowd” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
565	9:17	a2j6			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
566	9:17	eluu			πνεῦμα	1	See how you translated the word spirit in Mark 1:23.
567	9:18	h98h			ξηραίνεται	1	Alternate translation: “his body becomes rigid”
568	9:18	zre6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἴσχυσαν	1	The phrase they were not strong enough refers to the disciples not being able to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
569	9:19	tb67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει	1	Here, the pronoun them is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom them refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,them probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
570	9:19	azc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a generation, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun generation in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
571	9:19	nbw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος	1	Jesus uses the term generation to mean all the people who were alive at that time in history, and specifically, to refer to all the people who were present with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy)
572	9:19	c88a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν	1	Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, until when will I be with you and Until when will I bear with you, to show his frustration and disappointment with their unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “You unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you much longer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
573	9:19	n4dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	The question until when will I be with you and the question Until when will I bear with you have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “how long must I be with you and endure your unbelief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
574	9:19	b7u5			ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “Until when should I endure you” or “Until when must I put up with you” or “How long must I endure you”
575	9:19	nrya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word Bring is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
576	9:20	bw3l			πνεῦμα	1	See how you translated the word spirit in Mark 1:23.
577	9:20	l4r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun him refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute spirit and was mentioned in Mark 9:17. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
578	9:20	vdj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun him refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
579	9:21	f5zm			καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν	1	Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the boy’s father, ‘How long of a time has this been happening to him?’ And the father said, ‘This has been happening to him since childhood’”
580	9:22	f5yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	In the sentence help us, having had compassion on us, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first (here the speaker is the father). The normal way of saying this would be, “having had compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since having had compassion on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying help us first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
581	9:22	fbup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun compassion in another way, such as by using the verb “pity,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
582	9:23	vh6c			εἰ δύνῃ	1	The phrase If you are able is Jesus repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be more helpful in your language, you could express this as a statement or in some other way that is natural. Alternate translation: “You should not say to me, ‘If you are able’” or “You ask me if I am able. Of course I am able” or “Why do you say, ‘If you are able’”
583	9:23	kp1x			πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Alternate translation: “Everything is possible for the person who believes” or “Anything is possible for the person believing in God”
584	9:23	e5kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	The word believing refers to belief in God, and here it specifically refers to belief in Jesus and his power. The phrase the one means “any person” or “any one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for anyone who believes that God is able to do them” or “for any person who believes in God’s power” or “for anyone one who believes in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
585	9:24	h4y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	The sentence Help my unbelief does not mean that the man had no belief in Jesus or his power, but rather, these words express that the man realized he did not believe fully or believe to the extent that he should. The man is asking Jesus to help him overcome his unbelief and increase his faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Help me to have more faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
586	9:24	wssi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unbelief, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun unbelief in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
587	9:25	qaw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1	The phrase the crowd is running to them means that more people were running toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
588	9:25	b54j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1	The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people was running to them” or “many people were running to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
589	9:25	ul8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα	1	The words mute and deaf can be explained if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “You unclean spirit who are causing this boy to be unable to speak and unable to hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
590	9:25	zd5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	Your language may say “go out” rather than come out in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “go out from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
591	9:26	adb6			κράξας	1	Alternate translation: “after the unclean spirit cried out”
592	9:26	i8dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	Your language may say “went out” rather than came out in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “it went out” or “the spirit went out of the boy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
593	9:26	n7h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς	1	Mark is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the boy appeared dead” or “the boy looked like a dead person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
594	9:26	ns4t			ὥστε τοὺς πολλοὺς λέγειν	1	Alternate translation: “so that many people said”
595	9:28	f0x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον	1	Your language may say “come” rather than gone in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when he had come into a house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
596	9:28	zwjp			εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον	1	Alternate translation: “when he had entered into a house”
597	9:28	sd45			κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	Alternate translation: “privately”
598	9:29	pdk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ	1	The words nothing and except are both negative words. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This kind can be cast out only by prayer and fasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
599	9:29	v2s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτο τὸ γένος	1	Here, the phrase This kind refers to a kind of unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This kind of unclean spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
600	9:29	kh4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	τοῦτο τὸ γένος & δύναται ἐξελθεῖν	1	Your language may say “go out” rather than come out in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
601	9:29	yrzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of prayer, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun prayer by using a verb form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
602	9:29	l6ok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	νηστείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fasting, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun fasting in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
603	9:31	f4gm			ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
604	9:31	vpj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
605	9:31	w75k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase is being delivered with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
606	9:31	y5cw			ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	Alternate translation: “The Son of Man is being betrayed”
607	9:31	z8ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, hands means control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “into the control of men” or “into the custody of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
608	9:31	s1n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase having been killed with an active form and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “once they kill him, he will rise again after three days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
609	9:33	xv94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
610	9:33	l2kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος	1	Your language may say “go” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone into the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
611	9:34	gdg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς μείζων	1	Here, greatest refers to who was the greatest among the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612	9:35	z754		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
613	9:35	fkf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1	Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act as if he is the least important, and he must serve everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
614	9:35	jzl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	Being first refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being last refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being first and of being the “least important” as being last. If it would help your readers to understand what it means to be first and last in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express the meaning using plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
615	9:35	ioiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	Jesus is using the adjective first as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
616	9:35	um58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as first, you can express the meaning behind the word first in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
617	9:35	jqo3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
618	9:35	z9x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται & ἔσχατος	1	Jesus is using the future statement he will be last to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
619	9:35	t526			πάντων & πάντων	1	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
620	9:36	qqcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
621	9:37	h242			ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων	1	Alternate translation: “a child such as this one”
622	9:37	ul12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Here, name is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
623	9:37	uik3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	The phrase does not receive me but the one who sent me means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
624	9:37	y24n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the one refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
625	9:38	dxq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	Here, name is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression in your name means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
626	9:38	a3d3			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
627	9:38	k2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν	1	Here, following does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was acting in Jesus’ name. Here, following us means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
628	9:39	oynl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb prevent. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
629	9:39	yw2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀνόματί	1	See how you translated name in 9:38. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
630	9:39	h7ez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κακολογῆσαί	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun evil by using an adjective to describe it or by expressing it some other way that is natural in language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
631	9:40	tma4			οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “is not opposing us”
632	9:41	lz5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε	1	Jesus speaks about giving someone a cup of water as an example of how one person may help another, and the example could refer to any possible way that a person might help someone else. Here, giving one of the disciples a cup of water in Jesus’ name refers to helping them because they represent Jesus and are doing his work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar expression from your language or say this using plain language. Alternate translation: “gives you a cup of water because you are working for me” or “helps you on my account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
633	9:41	m0d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀνόματι	1	See how you translated name in 9:37. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
634	9:41	u325		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐν ὀνόματι	1	Here, the phrase in the name leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “in my name” or “in the name of me, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
635	9:41	bpz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε	1	Here, in the name because is an idiom which means to do something for the sake of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “because you belong to Christ” or “because you serve me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
636	9:41	bgq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ	1	Here, Jesus uses the negative phrase certainly not together with the negative word loseto express a strong positive meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he will certainly receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
637	9:41	wnb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reward, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun reward by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “he will certainly be rewarded” or “God will certainly reward that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
638	9:41	jjq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Although the pronouns he and his are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose their reward” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
639	9:42	cj0l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων	1	The phrase these little ones could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (2) a reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these new believers” or (3) a reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these common people” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
640	9:42	gef5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ	1	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Here, Jesus is making a comparison to the punishment that people will receive from God for causing other people to sin. Jesus means that the person’s punishment from God for causing people to sin will be worse than if that person had drowned in the sea. He is not saying that someone would actually put a stone around a person’s neck and throw them into the sea as an alternative to being punished by God. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
641	9:42	z6k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύλος ὀνικὸς	1	These large millstones were round stones used for grinding grain into flour. They were so heavy that they required a donkey or an ox to turn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
642	9:42	bx6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ	1	The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
643	9:43	g8dv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου	1	Here, hand is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do, something sinful with your hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
644	9:43	ifcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν	1	When Jesus says, if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off your hand, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in Mark 7:14-23, and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
645	9:43	wd7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	Here, the phrase enter into life is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and live forever” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
646	9:43	h9lh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal life maimed, he is not being literal, but rather, he is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
647	9:43	l5bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun life in another way. Alternate translation: “to live with God forever” or “live forever with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
648	9:43	ttl7			εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον	1	Alternate translation: “where the fire cannot be put out”
649	9:45	lx2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε	1	Here, the word foot refers to going, or desiring to go someplace for the purpose of sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you use your foot to walk someplace in order to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
650	9:45	so26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	See how you translated the phrase enter into life in Mark 9:43. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
651	9:45	vj49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν	1	When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal life lame, he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical injuries or impairments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
652	9:45	hbt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase to be thrown in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into Gehenna” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
653	9:47	okc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν	1	Being the organ of vision, the eye substitutes for looking at something. In this case, the person looks at something which God has prohibited, which in turn can cause the person to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to sin because of looking at something, tear your eye out” or “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
654	9:47	h4dv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the phrase enter into the kingdom of God is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. This phrase has a similar meaning to the phrase “to enter into life” which was used in Mark 9:43 and Mark 9:45. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s kingdom and live with him forever with only one eye” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
655	9:47	t7uv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	When Jesus speaks of entering into the kingdom of God with one eye he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
656	9:47	r2gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν	1	See how you translated the phrase to be thrown into Gehenna in Mark 9:45. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
657	9:49	mr5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς & πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase will be salted in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
658	9:49	ma3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	Here, fire is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them, so will be salted with fire is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified, as a sacrifice is purified with salt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
659	9:50	rb7r			ἄναλον γένηται	1	Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste”
660	9:50	fqb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε	1	By using the phrase with what will you season it, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
661	9:50	t76n			αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε	1	Alternate translation: “will you make it taste salty again”
662	9:50	f34y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1	Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were salt. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what salt means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
663	9:50	syc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1	The plural reflexive pronoun yourselves is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
664	9:50	tind		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1	The command, be at peace with one another, is an instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
665	10:intro	bq25				0	Mark 10 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in Mark10:7-8. Special Concepts in this Chapter Jesus’ teaching about divorce The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Metaphor Metaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Paradox A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” (Mark 10:43).
666	10:1	qq93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται	1	Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
667	10:1	goki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	Your language may say “comes” rather than goes in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
668	10:1	j5wa			καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1	Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River”
669	10:1	s6fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	συνπορεύονται & ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
670	10:1	vzb4			εἰώθει	1	Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he usually did”
671	10:5	m73x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν	1	Here, heart refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
672	10:5	xqzb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	The phrase hardness of heart is an idiom which describes stubbornly choosing to resist God’s will and desires and instead choosing one’s own will and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase “the hardness of their heart” in Mark 3:5. Alternate translation: “your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
673	10:6	m6lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς	1	Here, the adjectives male and female are being used as nouns in order to describe two groups of people, men and women. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these in another way. Alternate translation: “God made people to be men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
674	10:6	jz57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς	1	Beginning in the previous verse, Jesus begins directly addressing the Pharisees with the words “Because of your hardness of heart.” Here and in the next two verses, he continues to address the Pharisees. In this verse, Jesus begins quoting two Old Testament scripture passages, Genesis 1:27 and Genesis 2:24 which he concludes at the end of Mark 10:8. Jesus’ entire address is enclosed with double quotation marks. His quotation of the Old Testament is enclosed with single quotation marks, because it is a quote within a quote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, the Scriptures tell us that God made people male and female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
675	10:7	lfzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	Here, the word man is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
676	10:8	rd63			καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ	1	In this verse Jesus finishes his quotation of Genesis 1:27 and Genesis 2:24. Jesus began quoting Genesis in the second half of Mark 10:6.
677	10:8	p7yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ	1	A husband and wife no longer being two but instead being one flesh is metaphor illustrating the husband and wife’s close union as a couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or clarify this using plain language. Alternate translation: “the two people are like one person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
678	10:9	ty4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω	1	The phrase what God joined together refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one separate them” or “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one tear them apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
679	10:9	pty4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω	1	Here, although the term man is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “should not be separated by any person” or “let people not separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
680	10:10	l8fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν	1	The word this refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked Jesus about the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
681	10:11	i5kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὃς ἂν	1	Here the word Whoever does not refer to anyone in the world, but rather to any person who divorces his wife and marries another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
682	10:12	sn1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μοιχᾶται	1	Here, the phrase she commits adultery means that a woman who divorces her husband and marries another man commits adultery against her previous husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she commits adultery against the first man she married” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
683	10:13	zx1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word And introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
684	10:13	nmw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέφερον	1	Here, they refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
685	10:13	pk8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτῶν ἅψηται	1	Here, he might touch them means that Jesus would lay his hands on the children and bless them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might touch them with his hands and bless them” or “Jesus might lay his hands on them and bless them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
686	10:14	yi5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά	1	The phrase Permit the little children to come to me and the phrase do not prevent them mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be sure to allow the little children to come to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
687	10:14	qj7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ κωλύετε	1	If the double negative do not prevent would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “allow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
688	10:15	y3a2			ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν	1	Alternate translation: “if anyone will not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, that person will definitely not enter it”
689	10:15	a1e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς παιδίον	1	The point of the comparison, as a little child, is that Jesus is comparing how a person must receive the kingdom of God with how a little child would receive things. If it would help in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with humble faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
690	10:15	q3ck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν	1	Here, the word it refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
691	10:16	jq4f			ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ	1	Alternate translation: “embracing the children in his arms”
692	10:17	fpp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω	1	Here, the word inherit means “be given” or “receive” and is being used to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
693	10:17	d0iy			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
694	10:17	h45i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you can express the idea behind life by using a verbal form like “live,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
695	10:18	lw1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν	1	Jesus’ statement “Why are you calling me good” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using in order to make a point and not to obtain information. If you would not use a rhetorical question to make a point in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
696	10:18	gyod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	By saying, Why are you calling me good? No one is good except God alone, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and about what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher,” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life,” a person simply needs to know the right things and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God, a person must focus on God and put their trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
697	10:19	qs3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase Do not kill, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the Scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
698	10:19	hj3v			μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς	1	Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court”
699	10:20	bd3s			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
700	10:21	syq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ	1	Here, lack is a metaphor for still needing to do something. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to lack in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
701	10:21	rd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Here, the word it refers to the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
702	10:21	ux1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Jesus is using the adjective poor as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the phrase the poor with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
703	10:21	iij4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ	1	Jesus speaks of rewards in heaven as if these rewards are treasure. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you will be rewarded in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
704	10:22	afu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Although the term word is singular, Mark is using this term to refer to all of the instructions that Jesus gave the man in the prior verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
705	10:22	v58f			ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	Alternate translation: “someone who owned many things”
706	10:24	z9z1			ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “but Jesus said to his disciples again”
707	10:24	fh1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	Here Jesus is using the term Children to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and he regards them in that sense. If your readers would not understand the use of the term Children in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this plainly, as UST does. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
708	10:25	f15k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for rich people to enter into the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
709	10:25	t4y8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	This phrase, the eye of a needle, refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing needle through which the thread passes. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
710	10:27	vfyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Here, although the term men is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
711	10:28	hcv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
712	10:29	m1w3			ἢ ἀγροὺς	1	Alternate translation: “or the land that he owns”
713	10:30	sjhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	The phrase not receive in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you can state the entire sentence positively. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
714	10:30	heb4			ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ	1	Alternate translation: “in this present age”
715	10:31	y2lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	Jesus is using the adjectives first and last as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words first and last in Mark 9:35. Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
716	10:31	ym7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	Here, Jesus is using the words first and last metaphorically. See how you translated these words in Mark 9:35. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
717	10:32	hq7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	Some people were walking behind Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
718	10:32	k1nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
719	10:33	pv4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
720	10:33	qkq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1	When Jesus says we, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so we would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
721	10:33	s1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	In speaking of himself as the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
722	10:33	ha2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase will be handed over by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
723	10:33	ohsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
724	10:33	ils2			παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles”
725	10:34	ccd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀναστήσεται	1	In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
726	10:34	t0lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐμπαίξουσιν	1	The pronoun they refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
727	10:34	xv2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναστήσεται	1	The phrase he will rise refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from his grave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
728	10:35	li9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν	1	Here, the pronouns we and us refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
729	10:35	ch2r			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
730	10:36	he8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
731	10:37	xwf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun they refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
732	10:37	n1fv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν	1	Here, the pronouns us and we refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
733	10:37	bb98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	The phrase in your glory refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “beside you when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
734	10:37	kyg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun glory in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
735	10:38	v1bf			οὐκ οἴδατε	1	Alternate translation: “You do not understand”
736	10:38	yvu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω	1	The phrase to drink the cup is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo or experience. In the Bible, suffering is often referred to as “drinking from a cup.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “suffer as I will suffer” or “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering from which I will drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
737	10:38	pax6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1	The phrase to be baptized with the baptism is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and his death by crucifixion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
738	10:38	hlue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι	1	The phrase I am being baptized is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
739	10:39	r3pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronouns they and them refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
740	10:39	hc1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε	1	The cup that I drink is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
741	10:39	c15v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	In this verse Jesus continues to use baptism to mean something more. See how you translated Jesus’ symbolic use of baptism in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
742	10:39	humc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	The phrase I am being baptized and the phrase you will be baptized are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form as modeled by the UST or you can express the meaning in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
743	10:40	pdc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται	1	The word it refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
744	10:40	eu9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡτοίμασται	1	The phrase it has been prepared is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in Matthew 20:23 that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
745	10:41	ad19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	The word this refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
746	10:41	i48d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ δέκα	1	Here, the ten refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
747	10:42	sbk8			προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Alternate translation: “after Jesus called his disciples to him, he”
748	10:42	zfr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
749	10:43	zfz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	The phrase it is not this way among you means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you.” The phrase refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than do the Gentile rulers” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
750	10:43	fc3m			μέγας γενέσθαι	1	Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected”
751	10:43	gfun		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος	1	Jesus is using the future statement will be your servant to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in Mark 9:35 where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
752	10:44	e7sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἶναι πρῶτος	1	Here, to be first means being the most important. See how you translated first in Mark 9:35. Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
753	10:44	qzo8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1	Jesus is using the future statement will be a slave of all to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in 10:43, where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
754	10:44	u5yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔσται & δοῦλος	1	Jesus speaks of being a slave to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
755	10:45	ctta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
756	10:45	pmk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	οὐκ ἦλθεν	1	Your language may say “go” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
757	10:45	a3fr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διακονηθῆναι	1	The phrase to be served is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
758	10:45	rik1			διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι	1	Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people”
759	10:45	d9jd			ἀντὶ πολλῶν	1	Alternate translation: “in place of many people’s lives” or “in exchange for many people”
760	10:46	n4i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Ἰερειχώ	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “go” or “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went into Jericho” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
761	10:46	bq3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ	1	Your language may say “coming” rather than going in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “as he is coming out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
762	10:47	ow3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός	1	The people call Jesus Jesus the Nazarene because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
763	10:47	opm0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Here, Mark uses And to introduce a reason-result statement. And introduces the reason, having heard that it was Jesus, which resulted in Bartimaeus beginning to cry out and to say, “Son of David, Jesus, have mercy on me!” When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result statement. Alternate translation: “So” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result)
764	10:47	ynr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	The blind man is using the word Son to mean “descendant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
765	10:47	vwz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	David was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title Son of David implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
766	10:47	ylls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλέησόν με	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun mercy by using an adjective form such as “merciful” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
767	10:47	s2dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἐλέησόν με	1	The phrase have mercy is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
768	10:47	tvkh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλέησόν με	1	The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
769	10:48	ca5u			ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ ἵνα σιωπήσῃ	1	Alternate translation: “many people kept telling him not to shout”
770	10:48	m32u			πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν	1	The phrase was crying out much more could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. (2) that the blind man called out even more persistently. Alternate translation: “called out even more persistently”
771	10:48	l86a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με	1	See how you decided to translate this phrase in 10:47. Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
772	10:49	ac7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	φωνοῦσι	1	Here, the pronoun they refers to the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who they refers to. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
773	10:49	n6xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάρσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of courage, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun courage by using an adjective form such as “courageous” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
774	10:52	s5d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s faith. Jesus heals the man because the man believes that Jesus can heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you have believed in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
775	10:52	bjuw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of faith some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
776	10:52	ub7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνέβλεψεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sight, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “see,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of sight in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
777	11:intro	xg3t				0	Mark 11 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in Mark 11:9-10 and Mark 11:17, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter The donkey and the colt Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings. Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both; the donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)
778	11:1	ch4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐγγίζουσιν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
779	11:1	g1fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ	1	The word Bethphage is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
780	11:2	bi22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	Your language may say “Come” rather than Go in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
781	11:2	si41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμῶν & εὑρήσετε	1	Since the word you applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
782	11:2	r41g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	The term colt refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
783	11:2	yw78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	Although the term man is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense, that includes both men and women. He means that “no one” had yet sat on the donkey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “no person has yet sat” or “no one has yet sat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
784	11:2	zloo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	Jesus is using the term sat to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person has ever ridden” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy)
785	11:3	aw3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1	This verse contains two direct quotations within a direct quotation. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two direct quotations in this verse as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are untying the donkey, tell them that the Lord needs it and will send it back here as soon as he is done using it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
786	11:3	q446		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ποιεῖτε	1	The villagers would be speaking to the two disciples, so you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
787	11:3	xw55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο?	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase doing this refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
788	11:3	k7fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of need, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requires it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
789	11:3	yj5y			εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1	Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it”
790	11:4	y381		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπῆλθον	1	Here, they refers to the two disciples mentioned in 11:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
791	11:4	f6hc			πῶλον	1	See how you translated colt in Mark 11:2. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal”
792	11:7	k9g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	The word cloaks refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
793	11:7	sbqy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν	1	The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “draped the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
794	11:8	t8hy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1	Spreading cloaks on the road and branches was a way of showing honor to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and others spread branches they had cut from the fields. They did this in order to honor Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
795	11:8	jk2o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1	The words many, others, and they all refer to other people besides the disciples. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and other people spread branches they had cut” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
796	11:8	fwl0			ἱμάτια	1	See how you translated the word cloaks in 11:7. Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments”
797	11:9	d8se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ὡσαννά	1	The word Hosanna is a Hebrew word. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Hosanna had an original meaning of “save now,” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell Hosanna the way it sounds in your language or you could translate it according to how the word was used, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
798	11:9	ye41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	The word Blessed is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “God” is the one doing the blessing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
799	11:9	suib			εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	The phrase Blessed is the one could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “May God bless the one who comes in his name” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “God has blessed the one who comes in his name”
800	11:9	x1bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	Here, the phrase the one refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one who comes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
801	11:9	e2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	Here, the phrase in the name of expresses authority. The phrase in the name of the Lord means “with the authority of the Lord.” If it would help in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or express this plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” or “with the Lord’s authority” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
802	11:10	kkfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένη	1	The word Blessed is passive in form. See how you translated this word in 11:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
803	11:10	a6b4			εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	The phrase Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David could be: (1) an exclamation proclaiming that the future messianic kingdom promised to a descendant of David is blessed by God. (2) a prayer expressing the desire that God would bless the coming messianic kingdom. Alternate translation: “May God bless the coming kingdom of our father David”
804	11:10	yuap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Here, the term father means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand the use of father in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestor David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
805	11:10	b1si			ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	See how you translated the word Hosanna in 11:9. The phrase Hosanna in the highest could be (1) an exclamation of praise to God. (2) a prayer to God for salvation from Israel’s enemies. Alternate translation: “Please save us now, God in the highest”
806	11:10	vqm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	The phrase ** in the highest** is a way of referring to heaven, where God dwells. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state this explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
807	11:11	h2du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερόν	1	Since only priests could enter the temple building, here the word temple means the temple courtyard. Mark is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
808	11:11	t5nv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν	1	Your language may say “came” rather than went in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came to Bethany” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
809	11:11	rvd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
810	11:12	zr8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας	1	Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when they had gone out from Bethany” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
811	11:13	y447		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “came” rather than went in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
812	11:13	yg5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
813	11:13	j6cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
814	11:13	g76z			ὁ & καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	Alternate translation: “it was not the time of year for figs”
815	11:14	u3bk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	Jesus is addressing an object that he knows cannot hear him, the fig tree, in order to teach his listeners something. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing this fact by talking about the fig tree. Alternate translation: “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again” or “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
816	11:14	b362		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	The phrase to eternity is a Jewish expression which means “forever.” In this context it specifically means “ever again.” Mark assumed his readers would be familiar with this expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the expression to eternity explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
817	11:14	ij5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι & ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	The phrase no one will any longer is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If is would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
818	11:15	hj7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	Your language may say “going” rather than coming in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
819	11:15	c2wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερὸν	1	See how you translated the word temple in 11:11, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
820	11:15	hoym			ἐκβάλλειν	1	Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out”
821	11:15	s4m2			τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας	1	Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling”
822	11:15	ve56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	General Information: See how you translated the word temple in 11:11, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
823	11:16	ohxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱεροῦ	1	See how you translated the word temple in 11:11, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
824	11:17	xrz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Has it not been written is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
825	11:17	dxwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that his temple would be a place of prayer for all nations, but you have made it a den of robbers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
826	11:17	t9x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1	If your readers would misunderstand the phrase been written, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
827	11:17	qeix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1	God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his house because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
828	11:17	t1ho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a house of prayer. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
829	11:17	npdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται	1	The phrase will be called is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is probably best to say that people will call God’s temple a house of prayer, although it is also possible to say that God will call it that as well. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” or “Everyone will call my temple a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
830	11:17	qvxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῆς & πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of prayer, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
831	11:17	dpt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s den or lair. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
832	11:18	k6dv			ἐζήτουν πῶς	1	Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way that”
833	11:19	h4hg			ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο	1	Alternate translation: “in the evening”
834	11:20	s8ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν	1	The phrase the fig tree had been withered from the roots means that the fig tree had shriveled and dried up and looked dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered down to its roots and died” or “the fig tree was dried and shriveled down to its roots and had completely died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
835	11:20	a83v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξηραμμένην	1	The phrase had been withered is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered” or “had dried up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
836	11:21	jt3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναμνησθεὶς	1	The phrase having been reminded is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
837	11:21	na1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξήρανται	1	The phrase has been withered away is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has withered away” or “has dried up” or “has died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
838	11:22	ry5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἔχετε πίστιν	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase have faith is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
839	11:22	x8k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “Trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
840	11:23	sy61			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
841	11:23	mred		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	Jesus is using hyperbole to teach. He is using an extreme example to emphasize to his disciples that God can do anything in response to believing prayer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “that whoever prays to God and says, ‘God please take up this mountain and cast it into the sea,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
842	11:23	a01g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	Here, Jesus uses mountain to represent anything that would seem difficult or impossible to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to do it” or “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to accomplish it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
843	11:23	dwsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	This would not be a command that the mountain would be capable of obeying. Instead, it would be a command that directly caused the mountain to be taken up and cast into the sea by the power of God. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
844	11:23	c3cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ὄρει τούτῳ	1	Here, the phrase this mountain refers to the Mount of Olives, which was mentioned in 11:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
845	11:23	k3z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	The phrases Be taken up and be cast are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “God” is the one who would do it. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
846	11:23	y76p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1	In the expression doubt in his heart, the word heart represents a person’s mind or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “if he does not doubt, but believes” or “if he truly believes within himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
847	11:23	doeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1	The phrase not doubt is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
848	11:23	fzp5			ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”
849	11:24	pn9x			διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “For this reason, I say to you”
850	11:24	c61c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν & προσεύχεσθε & ἐλάβετε & ὑμῖν	1	In this verse, all four occurrences of the word you are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
851	11:24	abke		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	πιστεύετε	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word believe is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
852	11:24	tu5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔσται ὑμῖν	1	In the phrase it will be to you, the implication is that God will provide what is asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
853	11:25	m2aw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	στήκετε & ἔχετε & ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν	1	In this verse all occurrences of the word you and your are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
854	11:25	m7xi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι	1	It is common in Hebrew culture to stand when praying to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If it would be helpful in your culture, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “when you are praying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
855	11:25	f6ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος	1	Here, have something against anyone refers to any anger, unforgiveness, or grudge a person holds against another person for offending or sinning against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
856	11:25	ttxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1	In this verse, the first occurrence of the word forgive is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
857	11:25	swa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1	In the original language in which the author of Mark wrote this Gospel, the word forgive is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
858	11:25	jjs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says forgive with the goal that your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
859	11:25	omze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of trespasses, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
860	11:27	alh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase, he is walking around in the temple means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard. Jesus was not walking in the temple, since only priests were allowed inside the temple building. See how you translated the word temple in 11:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
861	11:28	se9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	The question By what authority do you do these things, and the question who gave you this authority could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?”
862	11:28	ooxp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ & ἐξουσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
863	11:29	erqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
864	11:29	aak2			ἕνα λόγον	1	Here, Jesus is using the term word in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
865	11:30	vpgv			τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?”
866	11:30	jj91			τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου	1	Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed”
867	11:30	sh7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word heaven to figuratively represent God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
868	11:30	i5is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, Jesus is using the term men in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
869	11:30	fr1b			ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men”
870	11:30	mc8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀποκρίθητέ μοι	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this book, the word Answer is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
871	11:31	s9vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
872	11:31	e7j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
873	11:31	nu1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	See how you translated heaven in 11:30. Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
874	11:32	tczm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
875	11:32	aus1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	The phrase From men refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
876	11:32	v2gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	See how you translated the phrase From men in 11:30. Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
877	11:32	b5qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
878	11:32	z93u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
879	11:32	z998		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	The author of the Gospel of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
880	11:32	dqlt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον	1	The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
881	11:32	x4bo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον	1	Here, the word all refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
882	11:33	rmbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Here, Mark uses the word And to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-and-result relationship. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
883	11:33	us4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ οἴδαμεν	1	The reply We do not know leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” or “We do not know where John’s authority to baptize came from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
884	11:33	av5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν	1	With the words Neither do I say to you, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
885	11:33	arpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
886	12:intro	ne55				0	Mark 12 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Hypothetical situations Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so their listeners can imagine them happening and learn lessons from them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter The son of David as Lord A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a Psalm that records David calling his son “Lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35-37, Jesus is trying to help his hearers understand that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So, David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
887	12:1	w2hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν	1	Connecting Statement: To help the people understand what the Jewish leaders were doing by rejecting him and John the Baptist, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the people stories to help them understand better. He began” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
888	12:1	qa93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν	1	Jesus uses the phrase A man planted a vineyard to introduce the main character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character in a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
889	12:1	l2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
890	12:1	fd71			γεωργοῖς	1	While farmers is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
891	12:2	s83v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ καιρῷ	1	This refers to the time of harvest. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made clear, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
892	12:2	su2e			γεωργοὺς & γεωργῶν	1	See how you translated farmers in 12:1.
893	12:2	oxoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καρπῶν	1	The word fruit could be: (1) literal. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
894	12:3	c321		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπέστειλαν κενόν	1	Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Here, the word empty means that they did not give him any of the fruit from the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to be empty in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
895	12:4	jhi3			καὶ ἠτίμασαν	1	Alternate translation: “and humiliated” or “badly mistreated”
896	12:6	z5hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “thinking that they would respect his son” or “thinking to himself that the farmers would respect his son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
897	12:7	m63e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this happened after the owner sent his son and the son arrived, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
898	12:7	kefz			γεωργοὶ	1	See how you translated farmers in 12:1.
899	12:7	s5dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ κληρονομία	1	By inheritance, the farmers mean “the vineyard”, which the son would inherit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he would inherit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
900	12:8	gx6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Jesus uses the word And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described, specifically that the farmers carried out the plan that they had decided on. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-and-result relationship. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
901	12:9	r4md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
902	12:9	tlji			γεωργούς	1	See how you translated farmers in 12:1.
903	12:9	g4ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 12:1. Alternate translation: “allow different grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
904	12:9	mc5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	The word others refers to other vine dressers who will care for the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other farmers to care for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
905	12:10	v6ta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	General Information: If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read the scripture that says that the stone which the builders rejected became the cornerstone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
906	12:10	xj9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε	1	Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture” or “And you should remember this scripture” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
907	12:10	mzr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	This quotation from Psalm 118 is a metaphor. It speaks of the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject the Messiah. The Psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, which is the most important stone in the building. This means that God will make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explicit explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
908	12:10	kv7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες	1	This Psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone which the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
909	12:10	l5ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
910	12:11	r8z8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	This entire verse is a continuation of Jesus’ quotation from Psalm 118. If you chose not to translate 12:10 as a quotation within a quotation, then you should do the same with this verse. Alternate translation: “and which says that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled as they looked at it” or “and that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled when they saw what the Lord had done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
911	12:11	k5w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	Here eyes represent “seeing,” so the expression in our eyes refers to the perspective of the person seeing the event. Alternate translation: “from our perspective, it is marvelous” or “we see that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
912	12:12	b1vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν	1	Here, the pronoun they refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in 11:27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
913	12:12	lx62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. The religious leaders fear of the crowd is why they left Jesus and went away. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “but because they were afraid of the crowd, they did not seize him” or “but they did not seize him, because they feared the crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
914	12:12	v9wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to show the logical sequence of events, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
915	12:12	v5wv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	Here, Mark uses the word but to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and the reason why they were not able to do so. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however, they were afraid of what the people might do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
916	12:13	z2sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν	1	Here, the pronoun they refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in 11:27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
917	12:13	pj3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν	1	The term the Herodians means those who supported the Roman Empire and Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
918	12:13	kuy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν	1	Here, Mark describes tricking Jesus as trapping him. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what to trap him means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
919	12:13	s1hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	Connecting Statement: Here, Mark uses the term word to mean something Jesus might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in something he might say” or “with something he might say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
920	12:14	dh3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	λέγουσιν	1	Mark could mean that one person spoke to Jesus on behalf of the whole group. So instead of they, you could say “one of them says,” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
921	12:14	xhl6			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
922	12:14	awv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	The spies are speaking only of themselves, so we would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
923	12:14	cp3x			οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	Alternate translation: “you do not try to earn people’s favor, but rather, you fearlessly teach the truth without worrying about people’s opinion”
924	12:14	xptc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1	The phrase not look at the face of men is a Hebrew expression that means “to not give attention to people’s outward appearances.” “Outward appearance” in this context refers to social position and whether or not a person was wealthy or influential or had a high social and/or religious position. This phrase, taken as a whole here, means that Jesus was impartial in his judgement and teaching and did not show favoritism. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for you pay no attention to external things when you speak” or “for you do not regard people’s position or status when you teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
925	12:14	qvpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the term face means “external status and position.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the status and social position of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
926	12:14	brm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, the word is used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
927	12:14	yfnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the Jewish leaders speak of how God wants people to live as if it were a way or path that people should follow. If it would help your readers to understand what way means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
928	12:14	ap2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you can express the same idea with an adverb such as “truthfully,” as modeled by the UST or in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
929	12:14	k0tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξεστιν	1	The Jewish leaders are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
930	12:14	gtsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Καίσαρι	1	The Jewish leaders were referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
931	12:15	g48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, εἶπεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hypocrisy, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But Jesus knew that they were not being sincere, so he said” or “But Jesus realized that they were trying to trick him, and so he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
932	12:15	c7nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
933	12:15	wl34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage for a laborer. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
934	12:16	ev6s			οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1	Alternate translation: “So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius”
935	12:16	gi96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Καίσαρος	1	Here, Caesar’s refers to Caesar’s likeness and inscription. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
936	12:17	fl4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι	1	See how you translated Caesar in 12:14. Alternate translation: “The things that belong to the Roman government, give back to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
937	12:17	la16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
938	12:18	edcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	Mark provides this background information about the Sadducees to help readers understand what happens in this episode. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who belong to a sect which denies the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
939	12:18	y8yo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	Mark uses the words Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
940	12:18	ss09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι & οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
941	12:18	rdl7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	The word resurrection refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
942	12:18	ax25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	λέγοντες	1	Mark could mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group. You could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
943	12:19	w3ev			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
944	12:19	e8x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	These Sadducees are referring to the law that Moses wrote as if Moses had written directly to them. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
945	12:19	m8fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	Here, the word us would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
946	12:19	kgws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον	1	Alternate translation: “if a man’s brother dies who was married but who did not have children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
947	12:19	g49e			ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα	1	Alternate translation: “that man should marry his brother’s widow” or “that the man should marry his dead brother’s wife”
948	12:19	m2um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ	1	The Sadducees assume that Jesus will know that this law specified that if the widow had children by her dead husband’s brother, those children would be considered the children of her dead husband. Alternate translation: “and have children who will be considered his brother’s descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
949	12:19	r0tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	The term seed means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would help your readers to understand what seed means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
950	12:20	wz27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἀποθνῄσκων, οὐκ ἀφῆκεν σπέρμα	1	While the Sadducees describe this as if it happened, they are actually asking about a hypothetical possibility in order to test Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers, and the oldest brother got married, but he died before he had any children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
951	12:20	pj71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ πρῶτος	1	Jesus is using the adjective first as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
952	12:20	pj2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ πρῶτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
953	12:20	af1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	See how you translated this sense of the word seed in 12:19.. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
954	12:21	uef6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	καὶ	1	The Sadducees are continuing to describe a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And suppose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
955	12:21	d61g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ δεύτερος	1	Jesus is using the adjective second as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
956	12:21	na6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ δεύτερος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
957	12:21	cgzm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	See how you translated this sense of the word seed in 12:19.. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
958	12:21	tbzw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως	1	The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow but also died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
959	12:21	l1ds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	Jesus is using the adjective third as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
960	12:21	hx1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
961	12:22	wjq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
962	12:22	l3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	See how you translated this sense of the word seed in 12:19.. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
963	12:23	w4wu			ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
964	12:23	c4p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ & ἑπτὰ	1	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
965	12:24	zp2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
966	12:24	sie3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
967	12:24	i8il			τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “how powerful God is”
968	12:25	nvh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	Both uses of the pronoun they refer to men and women in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” or “For when people rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
969	12:25	ox82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
970	12:25	y8vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can say who does the action in the second case. Alternate translation: “men marry wives and parents give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
971	12:25	ensg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	In this culture, the idiom was to say that men married their wives and that women were given in marriage to their husbands by their parents. If your culture does not use different expressions like that, you could use a single term here. Alternate translation: “they do not get married” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
972	12:25	asw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not marry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not marry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
973	12:25	pi8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	What follows the word but here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that the were mistaken to think that the existence of men and women in heaven would follow the same pattern or order of things as had their former lives on earth. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
974	12:26	mffe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the phrase the dead in 12:25. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
975	12:26	z36n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who does the action. Alternate translation: “the matter of God bringing back to life people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
976	12:26	eod4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here for emphasis in order to rebuke the Sadducees for not correctly understanding the Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have surely read in the book of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
977	12:26	jc5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the book that Moses wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
978	12:26	w2lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου	1	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that he means the bush in the desert that was burning without being consumed, the place at which Moses first encountered God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the burning bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
979	12:26	y35v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs	λέγων	1	In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “and he called out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
980	12:26	re82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
981	12:27	dgc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
982	12:27	xxzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ζώντων	1	Jesus is using the adjective living as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
983	12:27	v7ui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You misunderstand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
984	12:28	zqy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ & εἷς τῶν γραμματέων	1	Mark uses the statement And one of the scribes to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him as something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws,” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
985	12:28	b3yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν	1	Here, Mark is using the word seen to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
986	12:28	q1u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	Here, the scribe is using the word first to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of first in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
987	12:28	kftz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as first, you can express the meaning behind the word first in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
988	12:29	ztyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρώτη	1	Here, Jesus continues the use of the word first. See how you translated the phrase The first in 12:28, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
989	12:29	euim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πρώτη	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The first commandment is this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
990	12:29	n74y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πρώτη	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as first, you can express the meaning behind the word first in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase The first in 12:28, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
991	12:29	mq92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God addresses all of the people of Israel by the name of their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “O Israelites” or “descendants of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
992	12:29	mmtb			Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1	The phrase the Lord our God, the Lord is one could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s God for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only God they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special”
993	12:30	thj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
994	12:30	xjng		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely, with your entire person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
995	12:30	q49v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the desires and motives. Alternate translation: “with all your desires” or “zealously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
996	12:30	m8hi			ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ	1	Alternate translation: “with”
997	12:30	x3n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ψυχῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of soul, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
998	12:30	ln0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διανοίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mind, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
999	12:30	mii2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἰσχύος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of strength, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power” or “ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1000	12:31	eu8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δευτέρα αὕτη	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1001	12:31	fz8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δευτέρα	1	Here, Jesus is using the word second to mean “second most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of second in this context, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The second most important commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1002	12:31	oegh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	δευτέρα	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as second, you can express the meaning behind the word second in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1003	12:31	np4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1004	12:31	tp6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1005	12:31	pyc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτων	1	Here, the word these refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1006	12:32	uhgy			Διδάσκαλε	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
1007	12:32	qqm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1008	12:32	awe3			εἷς ἐστιν	1	See how you translated the phrase is one in 12:29.
1009	12:32	as2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος	1	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1010	12:33	v8yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅλης τῆς καρδίας	1	See how you translated the phrase whole heart in 12:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1011	12:33	xnq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	συνέσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of understanding, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1012	12:33	k42a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	See how you translated the phrase whole strength in 12:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1013	12:33	ekfy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν	1	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1014	12:33	ll9t			περισσότερόν ἐστιν	1	Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is greater than”
1015	12:34	hkf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν αὐτὸν	1	See how you translated the use of the word seen in 12:28 where it is used with the same figurative meaning. Alternate translation: “having understood him” or “having observed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1016	12:34	b144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adverb far. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1017	12:34	is4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus speaks of the man being almost ready to submit to God as being physically close to the kingdom of God. Jesus is speaking of the kingdom of God as if it were a physical place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1018	12:34	lfti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of kingdom, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1019	12:34	rgh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα	1	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1020	12:35	ptc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	See how you translated the word temple in 11:11, where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1021	12:35	q6e4			πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?	1	This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement.
1022	12:35	i6a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	Here, Jesus is using the term son figuratively to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what son means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1023	12:36	e1zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	Jesus uses the word himself here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1024	12:36	jlbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1025	12:36	ejy2			ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ	1	Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit”
1026	12:36	dv7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	Here, the term Lord does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1027	12:36	v53p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1028	12:36	k2j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1029	12:36	rfy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	Placing an enemy under one’s feet represents conquering them and making them submit. Here, it means that Yahweh would make His enemies stop resisting the Messiah and force them to submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1030	12:37	j7wn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1031	12:37	ka5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λέγει αὐτὸν	1	Here, the word him refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1032	12:37	ssq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	See how you translated the word himself in 12:36, where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person” or “David, whom we all respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1033	12:37	qpdy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον, καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν?	1	In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone Lord was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox. That is, it is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David respectfully addresses the Messiah as his Lord, but David should be more respected than his descendant. So why does David address him that way?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1034	12:37	rh2t			καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν	1	Like the question in 12:35, this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant”
1035	12:37	qucc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Jesus is using the word and to show that a conclusion should be made as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Use a natural form in your language for showing this. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1036	12:37	tjp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱός	1	Jesus is using the term son figuratively to mean “descendant,” as he did in 12:35. See how you translated the term son there. Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1037	12:38	bh8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	Mark uses the word And to indicate that Jesus is still sitting in the temple area taking to the people, as he was in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1038	12:38	rwxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase Watch out is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you watch out for” or “Every one of you watch out for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1039	12:38	yhfv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων	1	Jesus says Watch out to warn about the influence of certain people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1040	12:38	nxy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν	1	In this culture, long robes were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in long robes was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1041	12:38	mu5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀσπασμοὺς	1	The implication is that these would be respectful greetings in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1042	12:39	mwmf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας	1	Both uses of the word first here mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1043	12:40	jtw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	Jesus speaks figuratively of the houses of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1044	12:40	j27b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	Jesus says that the scribes are devouring or eating up the possessions of widows. He means that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1045	12:40	r3ht			καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι	1	Here, pretext refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they are offering long prayers”
1046	12:40	qm52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	Jesus is using the word condemnation to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1047	12:40	h36x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive greater punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1048	12:41	r69x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement: Mark uses the word And to introduce background information that will help his readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1049	12:41	nohd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου, ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον; καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά	1	This background information introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “after Jesus sat down he was watching the crowd put money into the offering box and noticing that there were many rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1050	12:41	p2kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου & τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with the treasury, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1051	12:41	w4xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1	The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1052	12:41	jgkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1	Mark is using the adjective rich as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1053	12:41	rl1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1054	12:42	g6ry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
1055	12:42	n29e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	A quadrans was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of two leptas in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a quadrans is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
1056	12:43	ipl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	General Information:	0	General Information: In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1057	12:43	q124			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
1058	12:43	ih0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ	1	Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, using it to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1059	12:43	n8z5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων	1	In context, all means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1060	12:43	n7su			γαζοφυλάκιον	1	See how you translated the term offering box in 12:41.
1061	12:44	c7jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces the reason for what Jesus said in 12:43. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1062	12:44	ihuq			ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον	1	Alternate translation: “had a lot of money but only gave a small portion of it”
1063	12:44	ui9a			αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “but she who had only had a very little money gave everything she had to live on”
1064	12:44	l4tp			τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “her lack” or “the little she had”
1065	12:44	p3as			τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “she had to survive on”
1066	13:intro	ti7d				0	Mark 13 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter The return of Christ Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned (Mark 13:6-37). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
1067	13:1	rrv1			Διδάσκαλε	1	General Information: See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
1068	13:1	ql81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί	1	Here, stones refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge stones are and how wonderful these buildings are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1069	13:2	rez6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and to emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1070	13:2	xdhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1071	13:3	izt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας	1	Here, the pronouns he and him refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were privately asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1072	13:3	u7ju			κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	Alternate translation: “when they were alone with him” or “privately”
1073	13:4	uf37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	Both occurrences of the phrase these things refer to what Jesus said in 13:2. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase these things refers to, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1074	13:4	lw1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “when God is about to fulfill all these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1075	13:5	fe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγειν αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew, who are mentioned in 13:3. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1076	13:5	qekc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase Be careful is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1077	13:6	z63u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Here Jesus uses the word name to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1078	13:6	cee7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1079	13:6	pbz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλοὶ & πολλοὺς	1	Here both uses of the word many refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1080	13:6	wv12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	The implication is that he means the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1081	13:7	fl5h			πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	The phrase “wars and rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
1082	13:7	d1k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1083	13:7	mi4d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	Here, the end implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1084	13:8	ydrb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1085	13:8	rlxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1	The word nation represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1086	13:8	oyrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1	The term nation refers figuratively to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1087	13:8	xln4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’	1	The phrase rise against is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1088	13:8	e2ln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1089	13:8	hz6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	The word kingdom represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1090	13:8	wpd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	The term kingdom figuratively represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1091	13:8	pcyi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	Here, These things refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1092	13:8	dz8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα	1	Jesus uses the metaphor of birth pains because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1093	13:9	nuti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς	1	Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to watch yourselves in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1094	13:9	c2cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς	1	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase watch yourselves is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1095	13:9	ulws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς	1	Jesus uses the word yourselves to draw the disciples’ attention to themselves, because he now transitions away from telling them about general signs and begins telling them about specific trials that they will personally encounter. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But give heed to yourselves personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1096	13:9	mbr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παραδώσουσιν	1	The pronoun They refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1097	13:9	voih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δαρήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will beat you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1098	13:9	zdp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1099	13:9	gbb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ & σταθήσεσθε	1	Here, made to stand before means to be put on trial and judged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1100	13:9	v23p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you can express the same idea in another way as the UST does or use a verb form such as “testify.” Alternate translation: “to testify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1101	13:9	qq6r			εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “to testify about me to them”
1102	13:9	y6p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to the governors and kings mentioned in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1103	13:10	ruk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρῶτον	1	Here, Jesus uses the ordinal number first in order to indicate position in an order of events. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can express this same idea in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before the end comes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1104	13:10	sfjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1105	13:10	e6ad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	The term nations refers figuratively to the people within each nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1106	13:11	uy91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παραδιδόντες	1	Here, handing you over means to deliver you to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1107	13:11	m0xq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1108	13:11	nr2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	Jesus is using the term hour figuratively to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1109	13:11	q2o3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	The phrase for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1110	13:11	a9b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1111	13:12	toqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1112	13:12	py9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς	1	Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1113	13:12	m6iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν	1	Although the term brother is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1114	13:12	utyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον & θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the same idea with a verb form. Alternate translation: “be killed … have them killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1115	13:12	b9ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πατὴρ τέκνον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “a father will deliver up his child to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1116	13:12	hrhw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πατὴρ τέκνον	1	Although the term father is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “parents, their children” or “fathers and mothers will deliver their children to the authorities to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1117	13:12	vjcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	Here, children will rise up against parents and put them to death probably does not mean that children will directly murder their parents. Rather, this probably means that children will deliver their parents to people in positions of authority and then these people will have their parents killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1118	13:12	r66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς	1	Here, rise up means to stand up. In this culture, people would stand up to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain that this will be the reason for their action. Alternate translation: “children will stand up to testify against their parents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1119	13:13	pk3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1120	13:13	w8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1	Here, everyone is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize to his disciples the fact that many people will hate them because they believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1121	13:13	jhp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, name is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person, their name. Jesus is using the phrase my name to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1122	13:13	w28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1123	13:13	c33n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	Here, endured represents having continued to be faithful to God even while suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1124	13:13	vcz4			ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	The phrase to the end could mean: (1) to the end of one’s life. Alternate translation: “who endures to the point of death” or “who endures till death” (2) until the end of time. This meaning means that believers must endure and keep on enduring until the time when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “who keeps on enduring to the very end” (3) to the end of that time of hardship and persecution. Alternate translation: “who endures until the time of testing is over”
1125	13:14	d4nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	The phrase the abomination of desolation is from the book of Daniel. Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about the abomination entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1126	13:14	vx3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ	1	Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1127	13:14	ck7a			ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	The phrase let the reader understand is not Jesus speaking. Mark added this to get the readers’ attention so that they would pay attention to this warning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show that this is not part of Jesus’ direct speech by putting brackets around this phrase, as the UST and ULT do, or you could show your readers in some other way that is natural in your language.
1128	13:15	m1hq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1129	13:16	y1e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω	1	The word cloak refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1130	13:17	bi8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις	1	The phrase having in the womb is an idiom meaning the woman is with child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1131	13:17	bv9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῖς θηλαζούσαις	1	This does not mean babies who are nursing but rather refers to women who provide their milk for their babies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1132	13:17	u8kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Jesus is using the term days figuratively to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1133	13:18	w47v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος	1	If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving all of this verse to the end of the next verse, since in the next verse Jesus gives the reason for praying this prayer. You would then present the combined verses as 18–19. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
1134	13:18	w91r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	χειμῶνος	1	In the location to which Jesus is referring, winter is the time of year when it is cold, and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel or you could translate winter with a general expression such as “in the cold season.” Alternate translation: “in the cold season” or “in the rainy season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1135	13:19	zs4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι	1	See how you translated the word days in 13:17, where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1136	13:19	l5u9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1137	13:19	e98e			οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη	1	Alternate translation: “of a kind that has not yet happened” or “which will be worse than any type of suffering that has happened”
1138	13:19	r1ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1139	13:19	c5sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ μὴ γένηται	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “there will never be days like these again” or “after this tribulation, there will never again be a tribulation like it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1140	13:20	y7g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν & ἐκολόβωσεν	1	The words cut short form an idiom which means “to shorten.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “did not shorten … he shortened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1141	13:20	el7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας & τὰς ἡμέρας	1	See how you translated the word days in 13:17 where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “that time … that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1142	13:20	kda6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Jesus is describing people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the flesh they are made of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “no people would be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1143	13:20	dosx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark makes clear that “the Lord” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “because the Lord will shorten the day, not everyone will die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1144	13:20	q8hm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Here, the phrase be saved refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1145	13:20	fz5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase to express the idea and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1146	13:20	af7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς	1	Jesus is using the adjective elect as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1147	13:21	d9gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	General Information:	0	General Information: In verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1148	13:21	qsfu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1149	13:21	yfd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἴδε, ἐκεῖ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1150	13:22	yw81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγερθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1151	13:22	n81i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς	1	See how you translated the phrase the elect in 13:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1152	13:23	jq8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε	1	See how you translated the word watch in 13:9 where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “be watchful” or “be alert” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1153	13:23	va6h			προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα	1	Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time” or “I have told you all these things before they happen”
1154	13:24	is3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word But shows a contrast between the events Jesus has just described and the events he will describe in 13:24-27. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1155	13:24	vmna		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	See how you translated the word days in 13:17 where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1156	13:24	n2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	μετὰ	1	The word after indicates that the events Jesus will describe in 13:24-27 will come after the events just described in 13:14-23. The word after does not express how long it will be before the events of 13:24-27 take place so you should choose a word or phrase in your language that communicates the sequential meaning of the word after but does not limit the time frame. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1157	13:24	mfy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “suffer” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1158	13:24	zy2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1159	13:24	a3qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς	1	Here, the moon is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the moon will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1160	13:25	hge7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	αἱ δυνάμεις	1	Here, the powers could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and planets in which case the two phrases the stars will be falling from the sky and the powers that are in the sky will be shaken are an example of parallelism. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, stars, and planets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) spiritual beings. Alternate translation: “the spiritual beings”
1161	13:25	au6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will cause the powers that are in the heavens to be shaken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1162	13:26	kl95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τότε ὄψονται	1	The pronoun they refers to the people of the nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the people of the nations will see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1163	13:26	yn52			τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
1164	13:26	a130		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1165	13:26	nlo7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλαις	1	Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the phrase coming in clouds means coming down from heaven in clouds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “coming down from heaven in clouds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1166	13:26	cd1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης	1	The phrase with great power and glory expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The term glory describes what kind of power Jesus will have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with very glorious power” or “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “with majesty and splendor” or “with awesome might and supreme honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1167	13:26	h4z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of power or glory, you can express the ideas behind the abstract nouns power and glory with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “to show he is very powerful and everyone should praise him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “to show I am very powerful and everyone should praise me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1168	13:27	nsyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους καὶ ἐπισυνάξει τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1169	13:27	a1z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς	1	See how you translated the word elect in 13:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1170	13:27	vpb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων	1	The phrase the four winds is a figurative way of referring to the four directions: north, south, east, and west; it means “everywhere.” Jesus speaks figuratively, using these directions in order to include everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the north, south, east, and west” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1171	13:27	u1vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ	1	The phrase from the four winds and the phrase from the end of the earth to the end of the sky mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “from everywhere” or “from wherever they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1172	13:28	c99s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς, μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν	1	Connecting Statement: To teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember, Jesus now gives a brief illustration. Consider the best way to introduce this parable in your language. Alternate translation: “Now I want you to learn this truth which the fig tree illustrates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
1173	13:28	ti6e			τῆς συκῆς	1	See how you translated the phrase fig tree in 11:13.
1174	13:28	u8ha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῆς συκῆς	1	Jesus is speaking of these trees in general, not one particular fig tree. Alternate translation: “fig trees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1175	13:28	z417			ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν	1	Alternate translation: “summer is about to begin” or “the warm season is about to start”
1176	13:29	q53b			ταῦτα	1	Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” or “the things I have just described”
1177	13:29	w1k7			ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1	The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as he is near could also be translated as “it is near.” If the phrase these things refers to the destruction of Jerusalem, then the translation “it is near” is the preferred choice. The phrase “it is near” then refers to the abomination of desolation and the other events related to Jerusalem’s destruction rather than to Christ’s second coming, which the translation he is near would indicate. Alternate translation: “it is almost here”
1178	13:29	aul8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1	The pronoun he refers to “the Son of Man”, which is the title Jesus used for himself in 13:26. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man is near” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1179	13:29	ini9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am near” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1180	13:29	iavl			γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις.	1	The phrase at the doors adds further detail to the phrase he is near. The phrase at the doors explains how near he is.
1181	13:29	z2pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπὶ θύραις	1	The phrase at the doors is an idiom which means that something or someone is very near, ready to enter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and is ready to enter” or “and waiting at the door” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1182	13:30	tg35			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
1183	13:30	m7ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ γενεὰ	1	Jesus uses the term generation to mean the people who were born in a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening” (2) “the people who are alive now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1184	13:30	h72r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ	1	Jesus is referring to death as passing away. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1185	13:30	h7dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, μέχρις	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “this generation will still be alive when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1186	13:30	t66q			ταῦτα	1	Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” or “the things I have just described”
1187	13:31	k4zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται	1	Jesus is using heaven and earth together figuratively to describe all of creation. Here, the term heaven refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1188	13:31	ah6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται	1	Jesus is using the term words figuratively to refer to what he has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1189	13:31	cq65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will remain forever” or “will always be true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1190	13:32	km5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας	1	The phrase that day refers to the time when Jesus will return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the day or hour when I will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1191	13:32	z3q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ	1	Here, heaven refers to the place where God lives; it does not refer to the sky. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1192	13:32	c1b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱός	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “me” or “I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1193	13:32	gwh2			εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ	1	Alternate translation: “only God the Father knows”
1194	13:33	pj0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀγρυπνεῖτε	1	Jesus is using the expression Stay awake in a figurative sense. If your readers would not understand what it means to Stay awake in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be watchful” or “Remain alert” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1195	13:33	i43k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν	1	Here, the time refers to Christ’s second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1196	13:34	ygl0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος	1	To help his disciples understand how they should live while they wait for his second coming, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand how they should live while they were waiting for his return: ‘As a man on a journey’” or “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand what their attitude should be like while they waited for him to return: ‘As a man on a journey’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
1197	13:34	iwt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς	1	Here, Jesus uses the word As to introduce a comparison. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a comparison. Alternate translation: “It is like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1198	13:34	huof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος	1	Jesus is speaking of a man or person in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “It is like when a person decides to go on a journey, and before leaving their house, that person asks their servants to manage the house. And the person gives each servant their responsibilities and commands the door-keeper to stay alert” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1199	13:34	w4dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1200	13:35	z7wi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word therefore indicates that Jesus is about to tell his disciples how to apply the story he told in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing an application. Alternate translation: “As a result” of “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1201	13:35	c96l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γρηγορεῖτε οὖν; οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ	1	What follows the word because here is the reason that Jesus wants his disciples to stay alert. Use a natural way in your language for introducing the reason given for doing something. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “therefore, stay alert! The reason you should stay alert is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1202	13:35	gx23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται	1	By calling himself the lord of the house Jesus is identifying himself as the “man on a journey” in the story he told in the previous verse. Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the lord of the house, will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1203	13:35	v6it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀλεκτοροφωνίας	1	Speaking of a rooster crowing, Jesus is referring to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at daybreak” or “at first light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1204	13:35	s8j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλεκτοροφωνίας	1	A rooster is a large bird, a male chicken, which calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1205	13:36	mh8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθεύδοντας	1	Jesus is using the expression sleeping to mean “not ready.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be sleeping in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unprepared for his return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1206	13:36	wd97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	εὕρῃ	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1207	14:intro	uk36				0	Mark 14 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus Mark 14:22-25 describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking figuratively and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. The new covenant Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Abba, Father “Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) “Son of Man” Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (Mark 14:20). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1208	14:1	hwb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement: Mark uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1209	14:1	xa8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν δὲ τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας. καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	During the Festival of Unleavened Bread the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this phrase as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “Now it was two days before the beginning of the Passover and the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast. The chief priests and the scribes were seeking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1210	14:1	ve8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες, ἀποκτείνωσιν	1	Here, both uses of the pronoun him refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could seize Jesus by stealth and kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1211	14:1	qtym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκτείνωσιν	1	These leaders did not have the authority to execute Jesus themselves. Rather, they were hoping to get others to kill him. Alternate translation: “they might cause Jesus to be put to death” or “they could have Jesus killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1212	14:2	em4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον γάρ	1	The pronoun they refers to “the chief priests and the scribes” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “For the chief priests and the scribes were saying to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1213	14:2	fk19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ	1	The phrase Not during the festival refers to not arresting Jesus during the festival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We must not arrest him during the festival” or “We should not arrest him during the festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1214	14:3	owfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	Both uses of the pronoun he refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And while Jesus was in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, while Jesus was reclining to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1215	14:3	bf84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ	1	The word Simon is the name of a man. This man previously had leprosy but no longer had this disease. If this man had still had leprosy, he would have been considered ceremonially unclean in this society and would not have been allowed to enter the presence of people who did not have leprosy. This is a different man than Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. Alternate translation: “Simon, the man who formerly had leprosy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1216	14:3	hh81			λεπροῦ	1	See how you translated the term “leper” in 1:40.
1217	14:3	sh4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	In this culture, the manner of eating at a feast or dinner party was to lie on a couch and prop oneself up with the left arm on some pillows. Alternate translation: “while he is lying on a banqueting couch to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1218	14:3	nl8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλάβαστρον	1	The word alabaster is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. Alternate translation: “a jar made of soft, white stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1219	14:3	hk2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύρου	1	This oil had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “oil with perfume in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1220	14:3	fqa9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	The perfumed oil was made from the roots of a nard plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with nard plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of highly valued scented oil made from spikenard roots” or “containing costly perfumed oil distilled from the nard roots” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1221	14:3	rw4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	In this phrase, the second occurrence of the word of is used to describe perfumed oil that is “made from” very precious pure nard. If this use of the possessive of would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “containing very precious perfumed oil of pure nard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1222	14:3	yb3w			πολυτελοῦς	1	Alternate translation: “very precious”
1223	14:4	v57p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν	1	These people are using a rhetorical question to emphasize that they thought the perfumed oil should not have been poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This woman wasted that perfumed oil!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1224	14:4	g9qw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς τί	1	Mark’s quotation is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For what reason” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1225	14:4	gjmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύρου	1	See how you translated the phrase perfumed oil in 14:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1226	14:5	xfzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ μύρον	1	See how you translated the phrase perfumed oil in 14:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1227	14:5	y113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠδύνατο & τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι	1	Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. If your readers would not understand this use of the passive form here, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1228	14:5	t4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	δηναρίων τριακοσίων	1	See how you translated the phrase perfumed oil in 6:37. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
1229	14:5	h62k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Here, the adjective poor is being used as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the money given to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1230	14:5	k83q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Here, the word given refers to giving the money which could be made from the sale of the perfumed oil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1231	14:5	kmpd			καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ	1	Alternate translation: “And then they spoke harshly to her because of what she had done”
1232	14:6	r9wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε	1	With the statement Why are you causing trouble for her, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form here to rebuke the guests who are troubling this woman regarding what she has done for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1233	14:6	f4yj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔργον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of work, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1234	14:7	tc3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	See how you translated the phrase the poor in 14:5. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1235	14:9	vr3w			ἀμὴν & λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement truly I say to you in 3:28.
1236	14:9	ysc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1237	14:9	ljh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “my followers will also speak of what she has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1238	14:9	u2ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μνημόσυνον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of remembrance, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST, or you can express the same idea in another way that is natural in your language.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1239	14:10	br8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδας Ἰσκαριὼθ	1	See how you translated the name Judas Iscariot in Mark 3:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1240	14:10	tq5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1241	14:10	z71f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς	1	Judas did not deliver Jesus to the chief priests yet. Rather, he went to make such arrangements with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in order to arrange with them that he would deliver Jesus over to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1242	14:10	hmhr			ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “to help them arrest Jesus”
1243	14:10	khvb			παραδοῖ	1	See how you translated the word “betrayed” in 3:19.
1244	14:10	u2ec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1245	14:11	kzk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες	1	It may be helpful to your readers to state explicitly what the chief priests heard. Alternate translation: “But the chief priests, when they heard that Judas Iscariot was willing to betray Jesus to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1246	14:11	m4il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι	1	Mark is speaking figuratively of money by reference to the precious metal, silver, that gives money its value. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to pay money to Judas for doing this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1247	14:11	f7ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐζήτει	1	The pronoun he refers to Judas Iscariot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas Iscariot was seeking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1248	14:11	jrym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The second occurrence of the pronoun him in this verse refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1249	14:12	vxax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	This was the first day of the seven-day festival described in 14:1. You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1250	14:12	bel5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα	1	Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, Passover to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1251	14:13	suny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & ὑμῖν	1	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns them and you would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1252	14:13	cijy			καὶ ἀπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων	1	Alternate translation: “and you will see a man carrying a jug of water”
1253	14:13	a7xg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κεράμιον ὕδατος	1	Here, pitcher of water means not a small serving pitcher, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1254	14:14	i344		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1255	14:14	yhtm			διδάσκαλος	1	See how you translated Teacher in 4:38.
1256	14:14	imqg			τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ	1	Alternate translation: “to the owner of that house”
1257	14:14	q3pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, Passover, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1258	14:15	jlci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀνάγαιον	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1259	14:15	x3zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον	1	The word furnished is a passive verbal form. If your language does not use such forms, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “one he has furnished and made ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1260	14:15	k4t7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here, when Jesus says us, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1261	14:16	sb35			ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ	1	Alternate translation: “the two disciples departed”
1262	14:16	wkh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, Passover, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1263	14:17	i1q1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express explicitly to where Jesus and his disciples came. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1264	14:17	t0q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1265	14:17	bheu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1266	14:18	cwl8			ἀνακειμένων	1	See how you translated the phrase reclining to eat in 14:3.
1267	14:18	dg95			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
1268	14:18	v5es			παραδώσει	1	See how you translated the word betray in 14:10.
1269	14:19	layt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι	1	The pronoun They refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The disciples began to be sorrowful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1270	14:19	v3a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἷς κατὰ εἷς	1	The phrase one by one is an idiom meaning “one at a time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one at a time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1271	14:19	f13p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μήτι	1	The phrase Surely not is the ULT’s translation of the negative Greek word that Mark used. The Greek word that Mark used is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1272	14:20	n1tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εἷς τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “He is one of the twelve of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1273	14:20	htn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	Part of the Passover meal involved dipping bread into a flavored sauce called haroseth sauce. Mark assumes that his readers will know this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “dipping his bread into the bowl with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1274	14:21	cif4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “For I, the Son of Man, am going away just as Scripture says about me, but woe to that man by whom I will be betrayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1275	14:21	h35q			Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
1276	14:21	q5l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus uses the phrase going away to refer to his death. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die just as the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1277	14:21	hl6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here, Mark uses it is written to mean that it is prophesied in the Old Testament Scriptures. Mark assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1278	14:21	b13q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “people” did it. Alternate translation: “men inspired by God have written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1279	14:21	f51n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who betrays him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “who betrays me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1280	14:21	ct78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who is betraying the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1281	14:22	ne53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτον	1	The term bread refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. The bread referred to here was a flat loaf of unleavened bread that was eaten as part of the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “a loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1282	14:22	ukuc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄρτον	1	Since Jews did not eat bread made with yeast during this festival, this bread would not have had any yeast in it and it would have been flat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1283	14:22	oqv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογήσας	1	Mark assumes that his readers will know that the phrase having blessed it means that Jesus prayed to God before they ate the bread. Jewish people would have known that at the beginning of the Passover meal the host would begin the meal by praying a prayer of praise to God for the bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and having prayed and given thanks to God for it” or “and having prayed a prayer of praise to God for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1284	14:22	ula2			ἔκλασεν	1	Jesus may have divided the loaf of bread into many pieces, as the UST says, or he may have divided it into two pieces and given those to the apostles to divide among themselves. If possible, use an expression in your language that would apply to either situation.
1285	14:22	amg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς	1	The implication of the phrase and gave it to them is that Jesus gave the bread to the disciples to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and gave it to them to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1286	14:22	adb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase This is my body. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This represents my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My body is really present in this bread”
1287	14:23	u6rc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	λαβὼν ποτήριον	1	Here, cup is a metonym for wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken the cup of wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1288	14:23	whqj			εὐχαριστήσας	1	Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God”
1289	14:24	q5hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the blood of the animals. Here Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which ratifies the covenant, and my blood is being poured out for many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1290	14:24	nj85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	The phrase of the introduces the purpose for Jesus shedding his blood. Jesus is stating that the purpose for him shedding his blood is to establish the new covenant. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of establishing God’s covenant” or “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of making God’s covenant with his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1291	14:24	hs24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase This is my blood. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This wine represents my blood which establishes the covenant, and it is my blood which I will pour out for many” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many, is really present in this wine”
1292	14:24	pt5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	Jesus is referring to the way his blood is going to be poured out when he dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which I will pour out for many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1293	14:25	i9yk			ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
1294	14:25	mxwn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ὅτι οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ πίω ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου, ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ὅταν αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν	1	The phrase certainly not and the phrase any longer are both negative phrases, and therefore, this is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that you can know for certain that the next time I drink wine will be when I drink it new” or “that you could know for certain that I will only drink wine again when I drink it new” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1295	14:25	t7ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου	1	Jesus is referring to the juice (which is fermented and becomes wine) that people squeeze from grapes that grow on grapevines as if it were the fruit or the grapes themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1296	14:25	qyf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας	1	Here Jesus uses the term day to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1297	14:25	y1pf			αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν, ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word new could be referring to: (1) Jesus, and therefore would mean “again” or “in a new way.” See the parallel account in Luke 22:18 where Jesus seems to mean this. Alternate translation: “I drink it in a new way in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it anew in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it again when I celebrate the Passover after it is fulfilled when God’s kingdom is consummated” (2) the wine and thus would be referring to drinking a new type or quality of wine. Alternate translation: “I drink new wine”
1298	14:25	ue3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you decided to translate the phrase the kingdom of God in 1:15. If it would be helpful in your language to understand the abstract noun kingdom, you could express the idea behind it with a verb such as “rule” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1299	14:26	l996		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑμνήσαντες	1	A hymn is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113-118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the hymn that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a hymn, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1300	14:27	pu4s			λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Alternate translation: “Jesus said to his disciples”
1301	14:27	lty4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε	1	Here, fall away is an idiom meaning “to desert.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You will all leave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1302	14:27	gkb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	Here, Mark uses it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, (Zechariah 13:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in God’s Word” or “it is written by Zechariah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1303	14:27	jp51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Zechariah” did it. Alternate translation: “regarding what would happen to the Messiah and his followers, Zechariah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1304	14:27	qzzv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1305	14:27	cv7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	Jesus is quoting a prophecy from from (Zechariah 13:7) in which the prophet Zechariah speaks of the Messiah as if he were a shepherd and of the Messiah’s followers as if they were sheep. Since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1306	14:27	w2az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea behind the phrase the sheep will be scattered in another way that is natural in your language. The phrase the sheep will be scattered does not necessarily imply that there is someone making the action of scattering happen, so try to translate this phrase in a way that simply shows that the sheep will be scattered without saying who will make the action happen. Alternate translation: “the sheep will run away in different directions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1307	14:28	dm1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγερθῆναί με	1	The phrase raised up means to having become alive again after having died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am made alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1308	14:28	qi4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “God raises me from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1309	14:29	op1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντες	1	By using the word all in this context, the implication is that Peter is referring to “all the other disciples.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the other disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1310	14:29	j961		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σκανδαλισθήσονται	1	See how you translated the phrase fall away in 14:27. Alternate translation: “leave you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1311	14:29	div5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐγώ	1	In the phrase not I, Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will not fall away” or “I will not forsake you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1312	14:30	z2q9			ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	See how you translated the statement Truly I say to you in 3:28.
1313	14:30	i4g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	See how you translated the similar phrase “rooster crowing” in 13:35. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1314	14:31	z9le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως & καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον	1	The phrase they all also were speaking in the same manner means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1315	14:32	deg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	The pronoun they refers to Jesus and his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1316	14:32	ni66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than come or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1317	14:34	eyw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	By using the phrase my soul, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1318	14:34	krj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ψυχή μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of soul, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1319	14:34	ic1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	Jesus is using the phrase even unto death to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase even unto death into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1320	14:35	nk8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν	1	Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1321	14:35	wc6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ & ἡ ὥρα	1	Jesus is using the term hour figuratively to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase the hour refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1322	14:35	gj74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1	Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the hour itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that the hour might pass, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1323	14:36	c11w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἀββά	1	The word Abba is an Aramaic word meaning Father and which the Jews used to address their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers, who did not know Aramaic. Since the Aramaic word Abba is followed by the Greek word Father, it is best to transliterate Abba and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1324	14:36	t9r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	The word Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1325	14:36	jk6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Jesus is referring to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a cup of bitter-tasting liquid that he would have to drink. If your readers would not understand what cup means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Please spare me from these sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1326	14:36	s1r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	The statement Remove this cup from me is an imperative, but it should be translated as a request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please spare me from these sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1327	14:37	ja6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “finds the three disciples sleeping” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1328	14:37	kp33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι?	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke Peter for falling asleep. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1329	14:38	hi36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of temptation, you can express the idea behind it with a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “pray, so that nothing will tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1330	14:38	zrp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	The implications are that the disciples will soon experience the temptation to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1331	14:38	c1je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ & πνεῦμα	1	Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated spirit in 2:8, where spirit is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1332	14:38	djxc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & πνεῦμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of spirit, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1333	14:38	gt2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πρόθυμον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1334	14:38	b909			ἡ & σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1	Here, the word flesh could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore flesh would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak”
1335	14:39	l9nj			τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών	1	Alternate translation: “and said the same thing he had prayed the first time”
1336	14:40	zkb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the three disciples’ eyes were weighed down, he found them sleeping” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1337	14:40	bgyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	Here, the pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “the three disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1338	14:40	vwlx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for indicates that what follows is the reason that Jesus found the disciples sleeping. Use a natural way in your language to show this connection. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1339	14:40	ht2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	The phrase their eyes were weighed down is an idiom meaning “they were very tired.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were very sleepy” or “they were very tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1340	14:40	hayg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tiredness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” or “their sleepiness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1341	14:41	x7qd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase the third time in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he comes yet again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1342	14:41	jo0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to his three disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1343	14:41	lw7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke his disciples for falling asleep and resting. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1344	14:41	wxmq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέχει	1	The phrase It is enough most likely refers to the apostles sleeping. They need to wake up and prepare for what is about tot happen. Alternate translation: “It is enough sleep” or “That is enough sleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1345	14:41	ae53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα	1	See how you translated the term hour in 13:11 where it is used with the same figurative sense. Alternate translation: “The time has come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1346	14:41	msb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold is an exclamation word that communicates that the listeners should pay attention. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1347	14:41	khqg			ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title Son of Man in 2:10.
1348	14:41	h5u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1349	14:41	eg9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone is about to betray the Son of Man into the hands of sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1350	14:41	uyzf			παραδίδοται	1	See how you translated the word betrayed in 3:19, where it used with the same meaning as it is here.
1351	14:41	mcns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	Here, hands is a metonym for control. See how you translated hands in 9:31, where it is used with the same figurative sense. Alternate translation: “into the control of sinners” or “into the custody of sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1352	14:42	ruj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	See how you translated the word Behold in 14:41. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1353	14:42	vkzb			ὁ	1	Alternate translation: “the person”
1354	14:42	qmm4			παραδιδούς	1	See how you translated the word betrayed in 3:19, where it used with a similar meaning as the word betraying here.
1355	14:43	ytk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	εὐθὺς	1	See how you translated the word immediately in 1:10. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential)
1356	14:43	nz4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	Connecting Statement: See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1357	14:44	r9cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν σύσσημον αὐτοῖς λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς	1	General Information: To help his readers understand what happens next, Mark provides this background information about how Judas had arranged his betrayal of Jesus with the Jewish leaders. Here Mark uses the word Now to introduce the background information which he gives in the rest of this verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Judas, who was going to betray Jesus, gave this sign to those who were going to arrest Jesus. Judas said, ‘Whomever I may kiss, he it is. Seize him and lead him away securely’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1358	14:44	bvwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun his refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1359	14:44	bzj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν	1	The phrase his betrayer refers to Judas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1360	14:44	lsh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτός ἐστιν	1	The phrase he it is refers to Jesus, the man that Judas was going to identify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one you should arrest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1361	14:45	qjh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προσελθὼν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1362	14:45	tpd4			Ῥαββεί	1	See how you translated the title Rabbi in 9:5.
1363	14:46	gszh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν	1	Here, laid hands on is an idiom which means to take hold of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “took hold of Jesus and seized him in order to take him into custody” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1364	14:46	y5qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν	1	The phrases, laid hands on him and seized him mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine these phrases into one. Alternate translation: “seized Jesus” or “seized him” or “took hold of Jesus in order to arrest him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1365	14:47	m6b9			τῶν	1	Alternate translation: “of the people who were”
1366	14:48	gv6e			ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the crowd”
1367	14:48	eq25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με?	1	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as an emphatic way to rebuke the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “It is ridiculous that you come here to seize me with swords and clubs as if I were a robber!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1368	14:48	djp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξήλθατε	1	Your language may say “go” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Did you go out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1369	14:49	my05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed to enter the temple building, so by saying the temple, Jesus means the temple courtyard. He is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1370	14:49	t9d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί	1	Jesus’ words But so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled could: (1) be an ellipsis. If this is the case, then Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Matthew, in his parallel account in Matt 26:56, supplies the words “all this has happened” between the words But and so that, so if this is an ellipsis these are the words that should be supplied. Alternate translation: “But all this has happened so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled” or “But, so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled, all this has happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) (2) instead be translated with an imperatival meaning as “But let the Scriptures be fulfilled.” Alternate translation: “But let the Scriptures be fulfilled”
1371	14:49	d8wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Jesus implies that both God and sinful humans are acting to fulfill Scripture. God is intentionally acting to fulfill Scripture by leading Jesus to be willing to die and not flee from those trying to kill him. Sinful humans are also acting to fulfill Scripture even though they do not know that they are fulfilling what God had foretold in the Old Testament would happen to the Messiah. Because of this, if you must state who did the action, it would be best to translate this in a way that includes both or allows for both. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill through the acts of sinful men what has been foretold in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1372	14:50	pk0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1373	14:50	gqz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφυγον πάντες	1	The phrase they all refers to Jesus’ 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all Jesus’ disciples ran away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1374	14:51	y5yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σινδόνα	1	The term linen refers to a high quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If you do not have linen in your region and/or your readers would be unfamiliar with this term, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a garment made of fine cloth” or “a garment made of good cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1375	14:51	nag4			κρατοῦσιν αὐτόν	1	Alternate translation: “the men seized that man”
1376	14:53	ze1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπήγαγον τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what the phrase they led Jesus away means. Alternate translation: “they took Jesus from where they had arrested him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1377	14:54	bzg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ	1	Mark provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed Jesus, not getting too close” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1378	14:54	l5gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ, ἕως	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly why Peter followed Jesus from a distance. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Peter followed Jesus, staying some distance away so that he himself would not be recognized and arrested. He followed as far as going” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1379	14:55	w23n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ ὅλον τὸ Συνέδριον	1	The word Now indicates that Mark is transitioning subjects and is now making the chief priest and the Sanhedrin the subject of the story instead of Peter. Use a natural way in your language for indicating this change in subjects. Alternate translation: “Now the men who were the chief priests and the entire Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1380	14:55	wlp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ μαρτυρίαν, εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν	1	The phrase seeking testimony against means that the chief priests and the Sanhedrin was seeking evidence against Jesus that they could bring to the Roman authorities and use it to accuse Jesus. This was not an official trial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “were looking for evidence against Jesus so that they could have him put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1381	14:55	xp1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μαρτυρίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verbal phrase, as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the idea in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1382	14:55	yew5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb form such as “kill” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “so that they could have him killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1383	14:56	quw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἴσαι αἱ μαρτυρίαι οὐκ ἦσαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verbal phrase, as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the idea in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the word testimony in 14:55. Alternate translation: “but what they said against Jesus was not the same” or “but when they testified against Jesus, they contradicted each other” or “but when they testified against Jesus, their testimonies were not consistent with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1384	14:57	vulz			ἐψευδομαρτύρουν	1	See how you translated the word testifying in 14:56.
1385	14:58	nbvu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, τὸν χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “We heard him saying that he will destroy this temple made with hands and in three days will build another made without hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1386	14:58	f82e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	The pronoun We refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus. It does not include the people to whom they are speaking. If your language requires you to mark such forms, We would be exclusive here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1387	14:58	e94y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον	1	Here, Jesus uses the word hands to mean “men”. Jesus uses one part of a person to refer to the entire person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “made by men … made without man’s help” or “built by men … which will be built without man’s help” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1388	14:58	hm5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄλλον	1	By saying another, Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word “temple” from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1389	14:58	v4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω	1	By saying another made without hands, Jesus is referring to his body which God would bring back to life after three days. Because this is a direct quote of something that Jesus said, you should keep this information implicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1390	14:59	atbz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ μαρτυρία	1	See how you translated the word testimony in 14:55. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1391	14:60	d7i8			καταμαρτυροῦσιν	1	Connecting Statement: See how you translated the word testifying in 14:56.
1392	14:61	p8b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁ & ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν	1	The phrases he was silent and the phrase did not answer mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not respond to any of the false accusations that were being made against him. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him at all!” or “Jesus did not reply to a single thing that was said against him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1393	14:61	o27t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ	1	Here, the title the Blessed One is a way of referring to God, so when the high priest asks Jesus if he is the Son of the Blessed One, he is asking Jesus if he is “the Son of God.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1394	14:62	c212			τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	See how you translated the title the Son of Man in 2:10.
1395	14:62	yhhk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	By calling himself the Son of Man, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1396	14:62	d5qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως	1	To sit at the right hand of God is a symbolic act of receiving great honor and authority from God. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what sitting at the right hand of someone meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “sitting in a place of honor beside the all-powerful God” or “sitting in a place of honor next to the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1397	14:62	e1xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως	1	By using the phrase of power, Jesus is figuratively referring to God by association with his power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture that expresses power, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” or “sitting at the right hand of God who is powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1398	14:63	jz48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothes was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what tearing one’s clothes meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “having torn his garments in outrage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1399	14:63	afd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων	1	By saying What need do we still have of witnesses, the high priest is not asking for information but is using the question form here for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1400	14:64	zwf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠκούσατε τῆς βλασφημίας	1	This refers to what Jesus had said, which the high priest labelled as blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have heard the blasphemy he has spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1401	14:64	fu4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “and said he deserved to be executed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1402	14:65	y1s4			ἤρξαντό τινες	1	Alternate translation: “some of those present” or “some of the people there”
1403	14:65	d56t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	περικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον	1	To blindfold someone means to tie a thick cloth around the middle of a person’s head to cover the eyes and prevent that person from seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain it with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to cover his eyes so that he could not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1404	14:65	gvq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προφήτευσον	1	The implication is that God would have to tell Jesus who struck him, since Jesus had his eyes covered and could not see who was striking him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Prophesy and tell us who hit you” or “Speak words from God and tell us who hit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1405	14:65	dg7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	προφήτευσον	1	The guards did not believe that Jesus was a real prophet and could Prophesy. When they demanded that Jesus should Prophesy, they were challenging him to do something they believed he could not do. They were only asking Jesus to Prophesy in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Prove that you really are a prophet and prophesy” or “Prophesy, if you really are a prophet” or “Prophesy and tell us who hit you, if you really are a prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1406	14:68	l5i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις	1	The phrase Neither have I known and the phrase nor do I understand what you are saying mean basically the same thing. Peter is using the repetition for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely do not know what you are talking about” or “I have no idea what you are talking about” or “I know nothing about this man from Nazareth whom you are speaking about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1407	14:69	v5kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1408	14:70	qjgs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξ αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated the phrase from among them in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1409	14:71	ce6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναθεματίζειν	1	Here, the phrase to curse means “to invoke a curse from God upon oneself.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to invoke God’s curse upon himself if what he was saying was not true” or “to ask God to curse him if what he was saying was false” or “to invoke God’s destruction upon himself if what he was saying was false” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1410	14:71	vihe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε	1	Here, the phrase to swear means “to subject oneself to an oath” or “to put oneself under an oath.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to swear by saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” or “to promise by making an oath and saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1411	14:72	i7u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν & ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 13:35. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1412	14:72	ja3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐκ δευτέρου	1	The word second is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase a second time in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1413	14:72	cfno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥῆμα	1	Mark is using the term word figuratively to describe what Jesus had said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1414	14:72	trxc			τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ	1	Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you do not know me”
1415	14:72	zr4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν	1	The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as having broken down could (1) be an idiom which means that Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief” or “having lost control of his emotions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) also be translated as “having thought of it” or “having reflected on it.” Alternate translation: “having thought of it, he was weeping” or “having reflected on it, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) also be translated as “he began.” Alternate translation: “he began weeping” or “he started crying”
1416	15:intro	d823				0	Mark 15 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter “The curtain of the temple was split in two” The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly, because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins. The tomb The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Mark 15:46) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Sarcasm The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they put a “purple robe” on him and placed a “crown of thorns” on his head (See Mark 15:17) and said, “Hail, King of the Jews” (See Mark 15:18) and bent their knees and bowed down to him (See Mark 15:19). These actions were symbolic of things that people would do to a king, but the soldiers did not really believe that Jesus was a king. By pretending that they thought Jesus was a king, and by putting a “crown of thorns” on Jesus’ head instead of a regular crown, and by “striking his head with a staff and spitting on him” (See Mark 15:19) the soldiers showed that they did not believe that Jesus was the Son of God. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Golgotha The word “Golgotha” is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them it meant “Place of a Skull.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani? This is an Aramaic phrase. Mark transliterates the sounds of this phrase by writing them with Greek letters. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1417	15:1	xz7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν	1	The Jewish religious leaders commanded that Jesus should be bound but did not bind him themselves. It would have been the guards who actually bound Jesus and led him away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then the guards bound him and led him away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1418	15:1	v2yf			παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ	1	Alternate translation: “delivered him over to Pilate” or “transferred control of Jesus to Pilate”
1419	15:2	kn7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει	1	Together the two words answering and says mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “responding to him, says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1420	15:2	dh6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σὺ λέγεις	1	You say so is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1421	15:3	b9sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς πολλά	1	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the chief priests were accusing Jesus of many things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
1422	15:3	ue18			κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά	1	Alternate translation: “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things”
1423	15:4	s2as			οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?	1	Alternate translation: “Are you not going to respond to anything they have said”
1424	15:5	way9			ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη	1	Alternate translation: “But Jesus made no further reply”
1425	15:6	ul19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν, ἀπέλυεν αὐτοῖς ἕνα δέσμιον, ὃν παρῃτοῦντο	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line as Mark shifts to telling background information about Pilate’s tradition of releasing a prisoner at feasts. Mark is providing background information in this verse to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “It was Pilate’s custom to release to them a prisoner of their choice during the festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1426	15:7	pdy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a continuation of the break in the main story line which began in the preceding verse. Mark introduces more background information, this time about Barabbas, to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1427	15:7	lx8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λεγόμενος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who bore the name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1428	15:7	wvzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “the Roman authorities” had soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “whom the Roman soldiers tied up and put” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1429	15:7	iofn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φόνον πεποιήκεισαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of murder, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1430	15:8	a4xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβὰς	1	Your language may say “having gone up” rather than having come up in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1431	15:9	o3j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς λέγων	1	When translating the phrase answered them, saying see how you translated the similar phrase “answering him, says” in 15:2. Alternate translation: “responded to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1432	15:10	i4ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Mark provides this background information about why Jesus was handed over in order to help readers understand why Pilate asked the question in 15:9. Mark introduces the background information in this verse with the word For. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1433	15:10	u647		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	The chief priests envied Jesus because so many people were following him and becoming his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. If you decide to express this information explicitly, consider beginning a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the chief priests were envious of Jesus because so many people were becoming his disciples. Pilate knew that this was why they had handed him over” or “the chief priests were envious of Jesus’ popularity among the people. This is why they had handed him over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1434	15:10	yjp3			παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “had delivered him over”
1435	15:11	y5w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	Mark speaks figuratively of the chief priests as if they had stirred a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the high priests encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what stirred up means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1436	15:11	pvu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces what the chief priests stirred up the crowd to request of Pilate. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1437	15:12	keq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar statement in 15:9. Alternate translation: “Pilate again responded to them, saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1438	15:12	p94y			πάλιν	1	Mark uses the word again here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in 15:9. Use a natural form in your language for expressing the meaning of again as it is used here.
1439	15:12	vlm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί οὖν ποιήσω λέγετε τὸν Βασιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων?	1	Pilate uses the word therefore because, as 15:11 indicates, the chief priests had “stirred up the crowd” to request that Pilate “release Barabbas” to them. So Pilate is asking what he should therefore do with Jesus if Barabbas is the prisoner to be released at their request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I release Barabbas, what then should I do with the one you call the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1440	15:12	r7ge			οὖν	1	Alternate translation: “then”
1441	15:13	n6jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	The Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with a crossbar and setting the beam upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. That was what it meant to Crucify someone. Alternate translation: “Nail him to a cross! Execute him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1442	15:13	nwms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	Here, the word Crucify is an imperative, but since the crowd cannot command Pilate to do this, you could translate the phrase Crucify him as an expression of what they want. Alternate translation: “We want you to nail him to a cross to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1443	15:14	e55i			σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	See how you translated the phrase Crucify him in 15:13.
1444	15:15	qt8y			τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	Alternate translation: “to make the crowd happy by doing what they wanted him to do”
1445	15:15	fwg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας	1	Mark assumes that his readers will know that Pilate did not actually flog Jesus, and he assumes his readers will know that Pilate ordered his soldiers to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1446	15:15	yzn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	φραγελλώσας	1	If your readers would not be familiar with this form of punishment, you could explain explicitly what flogging was. Flogging was a Roman penalty in in which they whipped a person with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal to increase the whip’s capacity to do harm to the person being flogged. Alternate translation: “having whipped Jesus with a whip with pieces of bone and metal attached to it” or “having whipped Jesus with a whip to which was attached pieces of bone and metal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1447	15:15	w1sl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1	The phrase so that introduces a purpose clause. With the phrase so that he might be crucified, Mark is stating the purpose for which Pilate** handed over Jesus**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and after having Jesus flogged, he handed Jesus over to them in order that they might crucify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1448	15:15	r9id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταυρωθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that Pilate’s “soldiers” did it. Alternate translation: “his soldiers might take him away and crucify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1449	15:16	eg6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον	1	By clarifying (that is, {the} Praetorium), Mark explains that the palace is the official residence of the Roman governor. This background information is given to help his readers understand exactly what he means by using the word palace. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which is, the Praetorium” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1450	15:16	lb2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πραιτώριον	1	The Praetorium was where the Roman governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem and where the soldiers in Jerusalem lived. Mark assumes that his readers will know what the Praetorium is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the palace where the governor and his soldiers lived” or “the Roman governor’s residence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1451	15:16	b5gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν	1	Mark assumes that his readers will know that a cohort was a unit of Roman soldiers. A cohort normally numbered around 600 men but could sometimes refer to a number as small as 200 men. Here, by saying the whole cohort, Mark most likely means all the soldiers from the cohort who were on duty at that time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that a cohort was a unit of Roman soldiers. Additionally, you could also say explicitly that it was only the soldiers who were on duty who were called together, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the whole unit of soldiers” or “the whole unit of soldiers who were on duty there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1452	15:17	tn33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ περιτιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον	1	In Roman culture, a purple robe and a crown were worn by kings. The soldiers put a crown made from thorns and a purple robe on Jesus in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. It may be helpful to your readers to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “they put a purple robe on him and placed on his head a crown that they had made by twisting thorns together. They did these things in order to mock him by pretending that they believed he really was a king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1453	15:17	ly5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πορφύραν	1	The word purple denotes a color. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the color purple, you could use the closest equivalent color that your readers would be familiar with such as “crimson” or “scarlet” (“crimson” and “scarlet” are two different names for the same color) since Matthew records in Matt 27:28 that the color of the robe was “scarlet.” The fact that Matthew and Mark use a different color to describe the color of the same robe probably means that its color closely resembled both “scarlet” and purple. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these colors, you could use the closest equivalent color that they would be familiar with, such as “red” or “dark red.” Alternate translation: “dark red” or “red” or “crimson” or “scarlet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1454	15:17	xfk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον	1	Mark uses the word thorns to refer to small branches with thorns on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a crown twisted together from thorny branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1455	15:18	ft1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἀσπάζεσθαι αὐτόν, Χαῖρε, Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	The word Hail was a common greeting, but the soldiers used this greeting in order to mock Jesus. They did not believe that Jesus was really the King of the Jews. They actually meant to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “to salute him by saying in a mocking manner: ‘Hail, King of the Jews’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1456	15:19	gz3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	καλάμῳ, καὶ	1	Matthew records in Matt 27:19 that the soldiers placed a reed in Jesus’ “right hand” and that “they mocked him” by saying, “Hail, King of the Jews!” At this time in history, kings used scepters. The reed would have resembled a scepter, so the soldiers are using a reed here to mock Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “with a reed that they were using as a pretend scepter, and they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1457	15:19	muvw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ	1	In this culture, the action of spitting on a person was a way to show thorough disgust. It expressed strong contempt for someone. If your readers would not understand the meaning of spitting on someone in this context and there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in place of this action. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1458	15:19	a8a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ	1	The acts of bending the knee and bowing down were things normally done as a way of honoring kings. The soldiers actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their actions. These soldiers do not really believe that Jesus is a king, but rather, they are doing these things to express mockery. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Also see the discussion about this idea in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “bending the knee, they were bowing down to him in order to mock him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1459	15:20	styv			πορφύραν	1	See how you translated the word purple in 15:17.
1460	15:20	dp33			ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “then they led him out of the city” or “required Jesus to carry his cross and then led Jesus out of the city” or “made Jesus carry his cross and led Jesus out of the city”
1461	15:20	euk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces the purpose for which Jesus was lead out, namely that they might crucify him. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1462	15:21	cj4l			ἀγγαρεύουσιν & ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.
1463	15:21	s4j3			ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	Alternate translation: “from outside the city”
1464	15:21	rtz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμωνα & Ἀλεξάνδρου & Ῥούφου	1	The words Simon, Alexander, and Rufus are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1465	15:21	n1oz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐρχόμενον	1	Your language may say “going” rather than coming in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1466	15:21	cyn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου	1	The phrase the father of Alexander and Rufus is background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1467	15:21	d3i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces the purpose for which they pressed into service a certain passerby, Simon of Cyrene, namely so that they could require him to carry Jesus’ cross. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1468	15:22	w6c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Γολγοθᾶν, τόπον ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπος	1	Connecting Statement: The word Golgotha is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant Place of a Skull. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1469	15:22	e49p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	Γολγοθᾶν & Κρανίου Τόπος	1	Matthew says in Matt 27:33 that Golgotha was “a place called Golgotha,” so it is clear that this was the name of a location, but the reason why this place was called Place of a Skull is not known. It could have been called Place of a Skull because the appearance of this place resembled a skull or because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the name Skull is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called Place of a Skull is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1470	15:22	m1dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1471	15:23	e9xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain that myrrh was a pain-relieving medicine. Alternate translation: “wine mixed with a pain-relieving medicine called myrrh” or “wine mixed with a pain-relieving drug called myrrh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1472	15:23	ld7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσμυρνισμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1473	15:23	r0xy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	What follows the word but here is in contrast to what was expected, that Jesus would drink the wine mixed with myrrh. Instead, Jesus refused to drink it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1474	15:24	s5m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ	1	The term lots refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with lots, you could state that they were “something like dice,” as UST does. But if your readers would also not be familiar with dice, then you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “and the Roman soldiers gambled for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1475	15:24	mn6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τίς τί ἄρῃ	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to decide who would take what” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1476	15:25	dzbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Mark uses the word Now to introduce the background information of the time of day when Jesus was crucified. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1477	15:25	q1ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη	1	The Jews and the Romans divided the day into a 12-hour time period and the night into a 12-hour period. Here the phrase the third hour refers to the third hour of the day, which was approximately three hours after sunrise. Here, third is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase the third hour as “nine o’clock in the morning”, as modeled by the UST, since this is what time the phrase the third hour is referring to. Alternately, you can express the meaning of the phrase the third hour in some other way that is natural in your culture. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock in the morning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1478	15:26	k1ku			ἐπιγραφὴ	1	Alternate translation: “notice”
1479	15:26	b84a			τῆς αἰτίας αὐτοῦ ἐπιγεγραμμένη	1	Alternate translation: “of the crime they were accusing him of doing”
1480	15:26	cbx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιγεγραμμένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1481	15:26	c0zf			ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	See how you translated the phrase “the King of the Jews” in 15:2.
1482	15:27	mgf3			ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “one robber on his right side and one robber on his left side” or “one on a cross on the right side of him and one on a cross on the left side of him”
1483	15:28	itjz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Καὶ ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “And by crucifying Jesus with robbers, they fulfilled the scripture that says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1484	15:28	d5g8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “And he was reckoned by God and by people as being with the wicked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1485	15:29	v8nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν	1	The people’s action of shaking their heads at Jesus showed their disdain for him and that they disapproved of him. If your readers would not understand what it means to shake one’s head at someone in this context and there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1486	15:29	a7ft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐὰ	1	Aha is an exclamation word that communicates triumph, usually over an enemy. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Take that!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1487	15:29	hy37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις	1	The people refer to Jesus by what he earlier prophesied that he would do. Alternate translation: “You who said you would destroy the temple and rebuild it in three days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1488	15:31	d5se			ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	Alternate translation: “were saying mocking things about Jesus among themselves”
1489	15:31	n13x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἄλλους ἔσωσεν	1	Here, the Jewish leaders are using irony. They do not really believe that Jesus saved other people. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He supposedly saved other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1490	15:31	o9qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλους ἔσωσεν	1	In context, the Jewish leaders are implicitly referring to how Jesus saved others by healing their diseases, releasing them from demon-possession, and helping saving them from other physical problems. They did not think that Jesus saved them from sin or divine judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “He supposedly saved other people by doing miracles for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1491	15:32	t1vm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω	1	Here, the Jewish leaders are using irony. They do not really believe that Jesus is the Christ, the King of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He calls himself the Christ and the King of the Israelites. So let him come down” or “If he really is the Christ and the King of the Israelite people, he should come down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1492	15:32	q5qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν	1	The Jewish leaders are using a hypothetical situation since they do not believe that Jesus actually has the power to come down from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate plainly that the Jewish leaders are using this as a hypothetical situation. Use whatever form in your language would be most natural to communicate this. Alternate translation: “If he really is the Christ, the King of Israel, let him come down now from the cross. Then we will see and believe that he is the Christ and the King of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1493	15:32	f8yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces the purpose for which they said that Jesus should come down now from the cross, which was in order that they might see and might believe. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1494	15:32	r6c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύσωμεν	1	The phrase might believe means to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1495	15:32	dcb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεσταυρωμένοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies in 15:20 that “soldiers” are the ones who are crucifying Jesus and the two other men. Alternate translation: “who the soldiers had crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1496	15:33	q1gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρας ἕκτης	1	The Jews and the Romans divided the day into a 12-hour time period and the night into a 12-hour period. Here, the phrase the sixth hour refers to the sixth hour of the day, often called “twelve o’clock” or “noon” in some parts of the world. The the sixth hour of the day was approximately six hours after sunrise. The term sixth is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase the sixth hour as “noon”, as modeled by the UST, or as “twelve o’clock.” Alternately, you can translate it in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in 15:25. Alternate translation: “the hour of twelve o’clock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1497	15:33	m67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης	1	The phrase the ninth hour refers to “three o’clock in the afternoon”, approximately nine hours after sunrise. The term ninth is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase the ninth hour as “three o’clock in the afternoon,” as modeled by the UST, or in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in 15:25, and the phrase the sixth hour earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “until three hours after noon” or “for three hours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1498	15:33	jvf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐγένετο	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1499	15:34	r6tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ	1	See how you translated the phrase the ninth hour in 15:33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1500	15:34	azt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐβόησεν & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	The expression cried out with a loud voice is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1501	15:34	ls1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει? ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου, εἰς τί ἐγκατέλιπές με	1	Jesus statement Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani is an Aramaic phrase. Jesus is quoting from Psalm 22:1. Mark uses Greek letters to express the sounds of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant My God, my God, why have you forsaken me. In your translation you could spell this phrase the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1502	15:34	qw71			ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	See how you translated the phrase which is translated in 15:22.
1503	15:35	apg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καί τινες τῶν παρεστηκότων, ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that some of the people standing by misunderstood what Jesus said, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1504	15:35	awtf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἠλείαν	1	See how you translated the name Elijah in 6:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1505	15:36	pj44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἠλείας	1	See how you translated the name Elijah in 6:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1506	15:37	xkpk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην	1	See how you translated the phrase cried out with a loud voice in 15:34. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1507	15:37	puak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐξέπνευσεν	1	Mark is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase breathed his last. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “he stopped breathing” or “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1508	15:38	sk3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη εἰς δύο	1	See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of the symbolic significance of this action. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1509	15:38	t71k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ	1	Mark assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the curtain that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the curtain in front of the Most Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1510	15:38	ni8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase was torn with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God tore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1511	15:39	hue4			ἐξέπνευσεν	1	See how you translated the phrase breathed his last in 15:37.
1512	15:39	ariw			ἀληθῶς	1	See how you translated the word Truly in 3:28. Alternate translation: “Certainly”
1513	15:39	nqv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς Θεοῦ	1	The title Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1514	15:40	i1ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία	1	The word Mary is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1515	15:40	gkgi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη	1	If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40-41, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
1516	15:40	zc9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ & ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ	1	Because Mary was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name Mary in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which Mary he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1517	15:40	z5ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ	1	The word James is the name a man. This man is probably referred to as the younger here to distinguish him from other men named James. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1518	15:40	wdrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσῆ	1	The word Joses is the name a man. This Joses was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in 6:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1519	15:40	qa0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλώμη	1	The word Salome is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1520	15:41	j15z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ	1	Mark uses the statement who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him to give his readers background information about the relationship that the three women mentioned in 15:40 had with Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1521	15:41	a3qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	αἱ συναναβᾶσαι	1	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going up to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “gone up” rather than come up in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone up with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1522	15:42	ekbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον	1	If it would be more natural in your language to introduce Joseph of Arimathea and what he did before giving the reason for what he did, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to verse 43 and taking the information about Joseph of Arimathea from verse 43 and placing it after the phrase And when evening had already come in this verse. You would then present the combined verses as 42-43, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
1523	15:42	lxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον	1	Connecting Statement: Mark provides this background information about what day it was to help readers understand what happens in this episode. God commanded in Deuteronomy 21:22-23 that any person who was put to death by hanging on a wooden object should be buried on the same day that they were put to death. Because of this and the fact that evening had already come and because the following day was the Sabbath, on which Jews did not work, the people involved wanted to bury Jesus’ body quickly. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1524	15:42	ug97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον	1	The phrase the Day of Preparation refers to the day on which Jews would make preparations for the Sabbath so that they would not have to do work on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what the Day of Preparation was. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Day of Preparation, on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath. The Day of Preparation is the day before the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1525	15:43	xn8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον	1	Mark places the phrase having come after he gives the background information about Joseph in order to provide emphasis and to help introduce Joseph to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea was a respected member of the council who also was himself waiting for the kingdom of God. He boldly came to Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1526	15:43	wgz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	The word Joseph is the name of a man, and the word Arimathea is the name of the place that he is from. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1527	15:43	u7ll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Mark provides this background information about Joseph to help readers understand why Joseph would ask Pilate for Jesus’ body and why Pilate might have granted his request. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1528	15:43	zvw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	The reason that Joseph asked Pilate for the body of Jesus was so that he could bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked for permission to get the body of Jesus in order to bury it” or “asked that he be given the body of Jesus so that he could bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1529	15:44	f484			κεντυρίωνα	1	See how you translated the term centurion in 15:39.
1530	15:45	z3gl			κεντυρίωνος	1	See how you translated the term centurion in 15:39.
1531	15:45	v5ys			ἐδωρήσατο τὸ πτῶμα τῷ Ἰωσήφ	1	See how you translated the name Joseph in 15:43.
1532	15:46	g4c9			σινδόνα	1	See how you translated the term linen in 14:51.
1533	15:46	eb9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελὼν αὐτὸν, ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας; καὶ προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου	1	Mark assumes that his readers will know that Joseph probably had help from other people when he took Jesus’ body down from the cross, prepared it for the tomb, laid it in the tomb, and rolled a stone against the entrance to the tomb in order to close it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph and the people who helped him took Jesus’ body down, wrapped the body in the linen cloth, and laid it in a tomb that was cut from a rock. And they rolled a stone against the entrance of the tomb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1534	15:46	g9hf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν λελατομημένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that a “person” or several “people” had cut the tomb from a rock. Alternate translation: “someone had previously cut” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1535	15:47	m782		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσῆτος	1	See how you translated the name Joses in 6:3. This Joses was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus mentioned in 6:3, although they share the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1536	15:47	jvz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	See how you translated Mary Magdalene in 15:40. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1537	15:47	yexp			Μαρία ἡ Ἰωσῆτος	1	See how you translated the phrase “Mary the mother of” in 15:40.
1538	15:47	v3wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τέθειται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can state it in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1539	16:intro	j5yz				0	Mark 16 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter The tomb The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Mark 15:46) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter A young man dressed in a white robe Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 28:1-2 and Mark 16:5 and Luke 24:4 and John 20:12)
1540	16:1	p61n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	By using the phrase the Sabbath having passed, Mark is explaining that the Jewish day of rest, called the Sabbath, had ended and that it was now permissible, according to Jewish law, for these women to buy spices. The phrase the Sabbath having passed does not mean that the actual day on which the Sabbath occurred was over. The Jewish Sabbath ended at sunset on Saturday evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the sun had set on Saturday evening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1541	16:1	cw1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἡ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Connecting Statement: See how you translated Mary Magdalene in 15:40. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1542	16:1	fm8u			Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου	1	See how you translated the phrase Mary the mother of in 15:40.
1543	16:1	nmvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλώμη	1	See how you translated the name Salome in 15:40. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1544	16:1	zrcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that introduces a purpose clause. The women bought spices for the purpose of anointing Jesus’ body with them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1545	16:2	qcmt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ μιᾷ	1	Here, the word first refers to the “first day” of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1546	16:4	kld9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can translate it in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1547	16:5	oaqk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	νεανίσκον	1	Here, the young man is actually an angel who looked like a young man. See the discussion of this under the General Notes section for this chapter.You should translate the phrase young man as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1548	16:6	mo0d			ἐκθαμβεῖσθε	1	See how you translated the word alarmed in 16:5.
1549	16:6	ie57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can translate it in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies in chapter 15 that Pilate’s “soldiers” did it. Alternate translation: “who Pilate’s soldiers crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1550	16:6	x9m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is implied that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead!” or “He has risen!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1551	16:7	x3u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τῷ Πέτρῳ	1	The phrase and Peter is not making a distinction between Peter and the disciples by indicating that Peter is not part of the group of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Rather, the phrase and Peter is being used to emphasize that of all of the 12 disciples of Jesus, these women should take special care to tell Peter the information that follows this phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and especially Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1552	16:7	axgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Πέτρῳ, ὅτι προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν; ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Peter that he is going ahead of them to Galilee and that they will see him there, just as he told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1553	16:8	dlji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθοῦσαι	1	Your language may say “come” rather than gone in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having come out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1554	16:8	sh40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of amazement, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “amazed.” Alternate translation: “for they were greatly amazed, and they trembled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1555	16:8	bdgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	Here, the word gripping is an idiom which means “overcoming.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for they were overcome by trembling and amazement” or “for they were overcome with trembling and amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1556	16:8	ydb0			καὶ οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον	1	Alternate translation: “And they told no one anything”